Home

Dodge 2008 Magnum Automobile User Manual

1. hoc ee ee ae oe Hes Sed OS Lae ee 115 Battery Savet sssi seseris QURE Era 124 Manual Seat Adjustment 115 Headlight Delay acc en 125 Front Seats Manual Seat Recliners 116 Headlights Parking Lights And Panel Lights 125 Manual Lumbar Support Adjustment If Daytime Running Lights Canada Standard Equipped 42e eee 117 And U S Fleet Vehicles If Equipped 126 Adjustable Head Restraints Front Seating Lights On Reminder 126 Positions vig e ERR eR x dos 118 Fog Lights If Equipped 00000 126 ORY nner DSBS pg Cango Light If Equipped sisse i Extended Cab Crew Cab Rear Seat i a 120 Multifunction Lever 04 127 Heated Seats If Equipped 120 ll Windshield Wipers And Washers 129 ll To Open And Close The Hood ss 121 WEES TIDOISI iin eee gita eae pase idi ID P EA 123 BEIDE endi aoe i Interior Lights asian 123 es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 77 B Tilt Steering Column visos en 131 Step B tt ite cuu dex Peewee Y EA 138 H Electronic Speed Control If Equipped 132 Average Fuel Economy AVG ECO 138 To Activate 2524 6 0545 fb bee e reris esa 133 Di
2. LATCH Anchors Installing the LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System if equipped We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the LATCH Anchors manufacturer when installing your child restraint Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here Again carefully follow the installation instructions that 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee were provided with the child restraint system The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars located at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and are just visible when you lean into the vehicle to install the child restraint You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion surfaces In addition there are tether strap anchorages at each LATCH seating position Refer to Child Restraint Tether Anchor in this section Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension in the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rear facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap a hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension of the strap You will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the
3. 129 131 363 Fluid oof etdad RR eid Bes 129 363 Windshield Wiper Blades 362 Windshield Wipers 2200040005040 rs 129 Wiper Blade Replacement 362 Wipers Intermittent 2 22 ceas seio ra 130 Wrecker lowing esaten ana EERE y E ES 347 YES Essentials Fabric Cleaning Procedure 379 INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals Mobile two way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained person nel The following must be observed during installation The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible The negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection This connection should not be fused Antennas for two way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible Use only fully shielded coaxial cable Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio SWR Mobile radio equipment with output power greater
4. 372 MERE dd oe Rear Side Marker Taillamps Stop Lamps Manual Transmission lus 372 And Turn Signal Bulbs Replacement 389 Automatic Transmission Ls 372 Center High Mounted Stop Light And Cargo Transfer Case 344 46 aces e Rte ai 375 Lampes wem oes eee EAE aw ET 391 D rm 375 License Lamps saeed s auai dpd saah 394 Appearance Care And Protection From Fog LENIS cocos iae a sta due eds 395 RE ne Bl Fluids And Capacities lesse 396 BP hee rod EURE PIU awe eee sees ve aol Bl Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts 397 Underhood Fuses Power Distribution Engine 397 Centen erae ane anaa E EE AERE 381 D ae se Sa Rea ee Ree CHASSIS i eu ead Sa ead ate S UPS 398 aM Vehicle Storage ak EREVAYRT RE Eq ERE 386 ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 351 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3 7L 5 Daa orsa 1 Air Cleaner Filter 7 Battery 2 Automatic Transmission Dipstick 8 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 3 Engine Oil Dipstick 9 Engine Oil Fill 4 Brake Fluid Reservoir 10 Coolant Pressure Cap 5 Clutch Fluid Reservoir Manual Transmission Only 11 Washer Fluid Reservoir 6 Power Distribution Center 12 Engine Coolant Reservoir
5. 04 346 Front Axle Differential lessen 376 Fuel icu pA SR ES TPER was 297 Adding i2 a cera essi Qe a oben Y 306 Galgp o chia eee nerd t es ene ks eed 168 Octane Rating 0 0 6 2 000 0000 297 397 Requirements llle 297 396 Tank Capacity pris acid os E race ts ier Ee 396 Fuel Flexible See Flexible Fuel Vehicles Fueling i o e REED ee 306 lit MP 381 Garage Door Opener HomeLink 142 Gas Cap Fuel Filler Cap 306 353 Gas Gauge Fuel Gauge 0 00 168 Gasoline Fuel 0 0000 eee 297 Gasoline Reformulated 298 Gauges Coolant Temperature 205 168 Eel ag E ao oes gen edd PR 168 Odometer 0 0 00 cece eee 171 173 Speedometer iss Ceo wes aera es 170 Tachometer 0 0 00 cece ees 171 Gear Ranges s veld es ade eth beds 243 246 General Information 0005 110 297 Glass Cleaning i cepe oS ce be ne SE erp 380 Grocery Bag Retainer 00000 000 153 HO 434 INDEX M Gross Axle Weight Rating 309 311 Gross Cargo Weight 0 0 0 c eee 308 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 311 GVWR soose 2408282 E rE TE AGA Sead 308 Hands Free Phone UConnect 82 Hazard Driving Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Water 0 06 264 Hazard Warning Flasher 332 Headlights 4x epe sete
6. 169 Dipsticks Automatic Transmission 372 OU Engine 445 6243 Soe eb i siea E 356 Power Steering ui pave doe RUP Pee eae 266 Disposal Antifreeze Engine Coolant 369 Door Locks 0 0 ec ee ee 29 Door Opener Garage 0 022 ee eee 142 Drive Shaft Universal Joints 361 Driving Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Water 2s 26 25s kp Caw cas 264 ESD FUCI centr as ERRORI E vac ao 302 Electric Remote Mirrors llle 81 Electrical Power Outlets lessen 149 Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control 132 Emergency In Case of Freeing Vehicle When Stuck 346 JACKING 2 5 arse pandas SRAM dette Gina a 337 Tow HOOKS 22399 geded4ne3e94 d o 2 ES 346 TOWING do eS ac atom alae tie ans oh Ad Md bas 347 Emission Control System Maintenance 354 400 Engine Air Cleaner 2 0 0 es 359 Block Heater 0 0 0 0 eiri cus eae 241 Break In Recommendations 70 Coolant Antifreeze 432 INDEX M Exhaust Gas Caution 000 71 302 Flooded Starting sil 240 Fuel Requirements 00000 396 Jump Starting 4 setos eb ea RR ses 343 e MEC 356 396 397 Oil Filler Cap emm eue aee rye s 357 OilSelection llle 396 OilSynthete i44 bed heh esias 358 Starting eicit ca hs X EC RR Rd RUE a OUR 239 Temperature Gauge 0 eee eee eee 168 Entry System
7. 04 96 Disabled Vehicle ceret CAG es 347 Guid sasite As bw ak bons bee Rd a 316 Recreational i425 o eR bc EIRRI 324 Weight sess seort tit aed eae IR Rede 316 Towing Assistance e cc cc xe casd d oe eae PES 96 Traction chia aes aaa e de AN ae deg ia ER EL d 263 Trailet TOWING 4 4 64 terest eden ee eee ES 310 Cooling System Tips 000 323 Hitch S eek ee RUE EUER 315 Minimum Requirements isses 317 Trailer and Tongue Weight 316 Wiring suas taceo sits sendia bios Pane in aa 320 Trailer Towing Guide 00 316 Trailer Weight 5 9 mee 316 en INDEX 443 T ansaxle cde ED RR REESE EA 245 Automati s 69 49344 braier ii 12 245 Manual 422224 ke ELA e Ra 14 Operation 224 55 54 49 re d IR Eo hed ad es 245 Transfer Case 2 ees 375 diti etne sea Ane Ae ae oR eee ewes 398 Transmission praed Dacica k aa eee eee 246 372 Automall 4 243 42399 99549 258 94 4s 239 246 372 Fd mne don SPs dde de ERR 372 398 Maintenance 44 23a reme HE PURI ed 372 Manuals g see eee mm mn 239 242 372 Shif ng s soreryrre eas ke sE RPS 243 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entry seme messes e et ee AN 26 Transmitter Garage Door Opener HomeLink 142 Transmitter Programming Remote Keyless ENUY ccs naked Ra c ex Sa e ees 25 Tread Wear Indicators Trip Computer 2s Rn ces 136 Trip Odometer 2s osse ropes me memes 173 Trip Odometer Reset Button 179 Turn
8. and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp e Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire Base System If Equipped The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver module e Four tire pressure monitoring sensors e Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp STARTING AND OPERATING 295 1 The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp will
9. e The UConnect system will play the phone names of all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to the lowest priority To select or delete a paired phone being announced press the Voice Recogni tion button and say Select or Delete Also see the next two sections for an alternate way to select or delete a paired phone ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 Select Another Cellular Phone This feature allows you to select and start using another phone paired with the UConnect system e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Select Phone and follow the prompts e You can also press the Voice Recognition button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone that you wish to select The selected phone will be used for the next phone call If the selected phone is not available the UConnect system will return to using the highest priority phone present in or near approximately within 30 ft 9 m the vehicle Delete UConnect Paired Cellular Phones e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e At the next prompt say Delete and follow the prompts e You can also press the Voice Recognition button at Em any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone you wish to delete Things You Should Know Ab
10. rules for your community To prevent ingestion by ani mals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child contact a physician immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Coolant Level The coolant recovery bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the engine coolant anti freeze level is adequate With the engine cold the level of the engine coolant antifreeze in the coolant recovery bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for engine coolant antifreeze freeze point or replacing en gine coolant antifreeze Advise your service attendant 370 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant recovery bottle need only be checked once a month When additional engine coolant antifreeze is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant recovery bottle Do not overfill Points to Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is nor mally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the
11. Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save the time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button and selecting the SET HOME CLOCK entry Once in this display follow the above procedure starting at step 2 INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183 RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a seco
12. Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have an accident Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with the Anti Lock Brake System ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is required Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON position The light should illuminate for approxi mately two seconds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175 The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON position NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application 21 Malfunction Indicator Light MIL The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is part of ie an Onboard Diagnostic system OBD II that monitors the emissions and engine control sys tem If the vehicle is ready for emissions testing the light will come on when the ignition is first turned ON and remain on as a bulb check until the engine is sta
13. Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible Continued 318 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Continued Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and will not shift during travel When trailering cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control You could lose control of your vehicle and have an accident e When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not over load your vehicle or trailer Overloading can cause a loss of control poor performance or damage to brakes axle engine transmission steering suspension chas sis structure or tires e Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade When parking apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in PARK With a manual transmission shift the transmis sion into REVERSE For four wheel drive vehicles make sure the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL Always block or chock the trailer wheels GCWR must not be exceeded Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer so that the following four ratings are not exceeded 1 GVWR 2 GTW 3 GAWR en STAR
14. Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident 312 STARTING AND OPERATING M Trailer Tongue Weight TW The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer is the tongue weight In most cases it should not be less than 10 or more than 15 of the trailer load You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle Frontal Area The frontal area is the maximum height and maximum width of the front of a trailer Weight Carrying Hitch A weight carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle These kind of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they re commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers Weight Distributing Hitch A weight distributing hitch works by applying leverage through spring load bars They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle s front axle and the trailer axle s When used in accordance with the manufacturers directions it pro vi
15. Occupant 1 200 los TOTAL WEIGHT 400 ibs 865 Ibs 400 Ibs 465 Ibs 811a4d11 280 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING Safety WARNING Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause accidents Underinflation increases tire flexing and can re sult in tire failure Overinflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION shock Objects on the road and chuckholes can Tire Pressure cause damage that result in tire failure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary lems You could lose control of your vehicle areas are affected by improper tire pressure Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect ve hicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting in loss of vehicle control Continued en STARTING AND OPERATING 281 WARNING Continued e Unequal tire pressures from one side of the ve hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left e Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to de
16. RER REN 1 Turn on the multimedia system 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197 3 To move the hour forward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing upward is dis played To move the hour backward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing down ward is displayed 4 To move the minute forward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing upward is displayed To move the minute backward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing downward is displayed 5 To save the new time setting touch the screen where the word Save is displayed Changing Daylight Savings Time When selected this feature will display the time of day in daylight savings time Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the multimedia system 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Daylight Savings Touch the screen where the words Daylight Savings are dis played to change the current setting Show Time if Radio is Off When selected this feature will display the time of day on the touch screen when the multimedia system is turned off Proceed as follows to change the current
17. Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the Winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 283 loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera Radial Ply Tires
18. ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221 Switch Position Light Operation Pulse right passenger side position In 1 this position the sound is active and the lights will pulse with the music Pulse off light off center position In this 2 position the sound is active but the lights will be turned off Constant left driver side position In this 3 position the sound is active and the lights will remain on constantly SATELLITE RADIO IF EQUIPPED REN REQ RER RES REU RADIOS ONLY Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to coast The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Radio This service offers over 130 channels of music sports news entertainment and programming for chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios NOTE Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska System Activation Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre activated and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio service that is included with the factory installed satellite radio system in your vehicle Sirius will supply a wel come kit that contains general information including how to setup your on line listening account at no addi tional charge For further information call the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at www sirius com or at www siriuscanada c
19. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 3 To reassemble the RKE transmitter case snap the two halves of the case together Make sure there is an even gap between the two halves If equipped install and tighten the screw until snug Test the RKE transmitter operation REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with a remote starting system which will allow the vehicle to be started from distances up to approximately 300 ft 91 m away from the vehicle using the Remote Keyless Entry RKE trans mitter which is part of your ignition key In order to remote start your vehicle the hood and all the doors must be closed To remote start your vehicle press the REMOTE START button on the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds To indicate that the vehicle is about to start the parking lights will flash and the horn will sound briefly if programmed 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M 81931ecc Remote Start Button Once the vehicle has started the engine will run for 15 minutes To cancel remote start press the REMOTE START button once The parking lights will remain illuminated to indicate that the vehicle has remote started and the engine is running The lights will turn off when the ignition is turned to RUN or the remote start is cancelled To enter the vehicle while the engine is running during a remote start you must first unlock the vehicle using the UNLO
20. WARNING Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat buildup may cause serious injury or death Manual Transmission Apply the parking brake place the shift lever in NEU TRAL and depress clutch pedal to the floor before starting the vehicle This vehicle is equipped with a clutch interlocking ignition system It will not start unless the clutch is pressed to the floor Automatic Transmission Start the engine with the shift lever in NEUTRAL or PARK position Apply the brake before shifting to any driving range NOTE This vehicle is equipped with a transmission shift interlocking system The brake pedal must be depressed to shift out of PARK Tip Start Feature Turn the ignition switch to START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will continue to run but will automatically disengage itself when the engine is running If the engine fails to start the starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds If this occurs turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the normal starting procedure 240 STARTING AND OPERATING M Normal Starting If Engine Fails To Start NOTE Normal starting of either a warm or cold engine WARNING is obtained without pumping or depressing the accelera tor pedal e Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the ve
21. including brake fluid level and parking brake application If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the anti lock brake system reservoir BRAKE If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Electronic Stability Program ESP sys tem In this case the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected If the problem is related to the brake booster the ABS pump will run when applying the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level The light will remain on until the cause is corrected NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi tions The vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is neces sary WARNING
22. 1 psi 6 9 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 C This means that when the outside temperature decreases the tire pressure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after a vehicle has not been driven for more than three hours and in outside ambient temperature Refer to the Tires General Information in this section for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure ee STARTING AND OPERATING 293 TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning threshold for any reason including low temperature effects or natural pressure loss through the tire The TPM System will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above recom mended cold placard pressure Once the low tire pressure warning has been illuminated the tire pressure must be increased to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the TPMS warning lamp to be turned off The system will automatically update and the TPMS warning lamp will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h to receive this infor
23. 24 22 05 16 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207 Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack i
24. Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully re view this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible To maintain warranty coverage follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning ve hicles used for trailer towing ee STARTING AND OPERATING 311 Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Gross Trailer Weight GTW The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equipment permanent or tem porary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination Note that GCWR ratings include a 150 Ibs 68 kg allowance for the presence of a driver
25. Fluid Level Check This fluid should be checked whenever other underhood services are performed The fluid level is checked by removing the fill plug If the level of the lubricant is more than 1 4 in 6 35 mm below the bottom of the filler hole while the vehicle is level enough lubricant should be added to bring the level to the bottom of the filler hole This fluid does not require periodic changing However if it becomes necessary to add or replace the fluid in these transmissions refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type Automatic Transmission NOTE If equipped with a dipstick use the following procedure If your vehicle has a capped dipstick it is sealed and should not be tampered with Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to ensure that the fluid level is set properly Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level while the transmission is at normal operating temperature 180 F 82 C This occurs after at least 15 miles 24 km of driving At normal operating temperature the fluid cannot be held comfortably be tween the fingertips ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 373 To check the automatic transmission fluid level properly the following procedure must be used 1 Operate the engine at idle speed and normal operating temperature 2 The vehicle must be on level ground 3 Fully apply the parking brake and press the brake pedal 4 Place the gear selector momenta
26. Layer 3 dud Se Aires 80 64 56 48 160 128 144 MEEG2 Audio 51220516 112 96 80 64 ayer 3 56 48 WMA Sampling Fre Specification quency kHz Bit Rate kbps WMA 44 1and4g 48 64 96 128 160 192 VBR ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for ID3 version 1 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193 Playback of MP3 WMA Files When a medium containing MP3 WMA data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 WMA files Loading times for playback of MP3 WMA files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc LIST Button DISC Mode for MP3 WMA Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob Selecting a fol
27. SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Press the RW button to stop the CD at the beginning of the current CD track title Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode 216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the SET RND button a second time to stop Ran dom Play Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supp
28. This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required 364 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING CAUTION Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involv ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO fol low the preceding safety tips mance have y
29. and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load ing either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer mm We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer They know you and the vehicle best 424 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s authorized dealers have the facilities factory trained technicians special tools and the latest information t
30. cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will CUPHOLDERS accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle s battery discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent engine starting Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will discharge the battery even more quickly Use these only inter mittently and with greater caution If your vehicle has bucket seats with a center console there are three cupholders located on the console Continued ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 Front Cup Holders Crew Cab Rear Cup Holders Crew Cab A two cavity cupholder is available on all Crew Cabs REAR STORAGE IF EQUIPPED with rear seats mounted on the floor Rear Convenience Storage Crates The rear convenience storage crates are located under the rear seat lower cushion and consist of two removable collapsible storage crates 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Do not sit or stand on this crate It may collapse causing serious injury CAUTION Do not lift up on the End Flaps to open the crate damage to the End Flaps may occur NOTE The maximum loading capacity for the small crate is 30 lbs 13 6 kg and 50 lbs 22 6 kg for the large Open Crate crate 1 Crate
31. illuminate in the instrument cluster and an au dible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h to receive this information The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp will flash on and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system fault is detected The system fault will also sound a chime If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp will turn off when the 296 STARTING AND OPERATING M fault condition no longer exists A system fault can occur by any of the following scenarios 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors NOTE Your vehicle is equipped with a n
32. in an appropriate child re straint Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front airbag An airbag deployment can cause severe injury or death to infants in that position ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 If a child between the ages of 1 and 12 years old must ride in the front passenger seat because the vehicle is crowded move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint Refer to Child Restraint in this section You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly 2 All occupants should use their lap and shoulder belts properly 3 The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the airbag room to inflate 4 If your vehicle has window airbags do not lean against the door or window Airbags will inflate force fully into the space between you and the door 5 If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person contact the Customer Center Refer to If You Need Customer Assis tance in Section 9 WARNING e Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The airbags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the airbags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belts even though you have airbags Being too
33. the tire rims mounted on the vehicle Determine the condition of the road or the path that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing water Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water This will minimize wave effects Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 265 CAUTION Continued WARNING e Driving through standing water may cause dam e Driving through standing water limits your vehi age to your vehicle s drivetrain components Al ways inspect your vehicle s fluids i e engine oil transmission transaxle axle etc for signs of con tamination i e fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance after driving through standing water Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated as this may result in further damage Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and cause serious internal damage to the engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty cle s traction capabilities Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water Driving through standing water limits your vehi cle s braking capabilities which increases stop ping distances Therefore after driving through standing water drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes
34. with the optional Trailer Tow Prep Package See your authorized dealer for package content The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition Refer to Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings for the website address that contains the necessary information for your specific drivetrain Trailer Hitch Classification Class Max GTW Gross Trailer Wt 2 000 Ibs 907 kg 3 500 Ibs 1587 kg Class I Light Duty Class II Medium Duty Class III Heavy Duty 5 000 Ibs 2268 kg Class IV Extra 10 000 Ibs 4540 kg Heavy Duty Fifth Wheel Greater than 10 000 Ibs Gooseneck 4540 kg All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle 316 STARTING AND OPERATING Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings NOTE For additional trailer towing information maxi mum trailer weight ratings refer to the following website addresses e http www dodge com towing e http www dodge ca Canada Trailer and Tongue Weight Always load a trailer with 60 to 65 of the weight in the front of the trailer This places 10 to 15 of the Gross Trailer Weight GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway
35. your vehicle is equipped with a headlight delay that will leave the headlight on for 60 seconds This delay is initiated when the ignition is turned OFF while the headlight switch is on and then the headlight switch is cycled off The headlights will remain on for 60 seconds Headlight delay can be cancelled by either turning the headlight switch on then off or by turning the ignition ON Headlights Parking Lights And Panel Lights DO When the headlight switch is rotated to the first position the parking lights taillights side marker lights license plate light and instrument panel lights are all turned on The headlights will turn on when the switch is rotated to the second position 81482f22 Headlight Switch Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight lenses that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol lowed by rinsing Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other abrasive materials to clean the lenses Daytime Running Lights Canada Standard and U S Fleet Vehicles If Equipped The headlights on your vehicle will illumina
36. 2 e 2 or press the ce button if so equipped Once comfortable choose a mode position and adjust temperature control and blower speed as necessary for comfort If sunny set the Mode control at or near 2 Jand press the lt button on If cloudy or dark set the Mode control at or near No ze is necessary If sunny set the Mode control at or between Js and pj then press the E button on If cloudy or dark set the Mode control at or near JT No aJis necessary In cloudy or dark weather set the Mode control at or near 3 If sunny set the Mode control at or between jand Aland for snowy or very cold weather requiring extra heat to the windshield use 2 In most cases turning on the Air Conditioning press the button will clear the fog then adjust temperature control air direction and blower speed to maintain comfort As it gets colder it may be necessary to direct air onto the windshield If so set the Mode control at 32 or S Jana adjust temperature control and blower speed to maintain comfort Higher blower speeds will reduce fogging 811b870c STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS H Starting Procedures 00040 239 W Manual Transmission 242 Manual Transmission llle 239 Shifting co ee eee REIR ERR ER Rh Automatic Transmission sss 239 Downshifting Normal Starti
37. 352 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se ENGINE COMPARTMENT 4 7L 1 Air Cleaner Filter 7 Engine Oil Fill 2 Automatic Transmission Dipstick 8 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 3 Engine Oil Dipstick 9 Coolant Pressure Cap 4 Brake Fluid Reservoir 10 Washer Fluid Reservoir 5 Power Distribution Center 11 Engine Coolant Reservoir 6 Battery ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 353 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transmission control systems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis sions well within current government regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION e Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage
38. 6 Glove Compartment 7 Radio 8 Climate Controls 9 Power Outlet 10 Heated Seat Switches 81c8b0e0 11 Transfer Case Switch 12 Speed Control Switches 13 Hood Release 14 Parking Brake Release If Equipped UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 167 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER oie CRUISE Ww QM caran as K 81071444 168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTION 1 Fuel Gauge The fuel gauge shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when ignition switch is in the ON position 2 Temperature Gauge The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera ture Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather up mountain grades or when towing a trailer It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range CAUTION Do not leave your vehicle unattended with the en gine running as you would not be able to react to the temperature gauge if the engine overheats 3 Turn Signal Indicators When a turn signal is activated a right pointing or left pointing arrow lights up and flashes to indicate the direction of the turn These indicators also indicate proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights If either i
39. 7 Liters 4 7L 4 7L HO Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certified 6 Quarts 5 7 Liters Cooling System Includes 2 1 Quarts 2 Liters for Cool ant Bottle 3 7L Engine MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula eo QUAS 12a Liters 4 7L 4 7L HO Engine MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula noe QUAM he Liters ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 397 FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Engine Coolant MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hy brid Organic Additive Technology Engine Oil Use API Certified SAE 5W 20 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade Engine Oil Filter MOPAR Engine Oil Filter P N 5281090 or equivalent Spark Plugs 3 7L Engine ZFR6F 11G Gap 0 043 in 1 09 mm Spark Plugs 4 7L Engine Upper Bank FR8TE2 Gap 0 039 in 0 99 mm Lower Bank FR8T1332 Gap 0 051 in 1 30 mm Fuel Selection 3 7L 4 7L 87 Octane Fuel Selection 4 7L HO Premium Unleaded 91 Octane only or higher 398 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Chassis Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Automatic Transmission MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid Transfer Case MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid Manual Transmission Getrag 238 MOPAR ATF 4 Autom
40. Blues R amp B defined Religious Music Rel Musc Adult Hits Adlt Hit Religious Talk RelTadk Classical Classicl Rock Rock Classic Rock Cls Rock l S6k S5H College College Soft Rock Soft Rck Country Country Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R amp B Foreign Language Language Sports Sports Information Inform Talk Talk ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185 16 Digit Character Program Type Display Top 40 Top 40 Weather Weather By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items NOTE Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll through the entries Push the AUDIO SELECT button to select an entry and make changes e DVD Enter When the disc is in DVD Menu mode selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current highlighted selection Use the remote control to scroll up and down the menu if equipped gt II e DISC Play Pause You can toggle between playing the DVD and pausing the DVD by pushing the SEL
41. E BM 4 Pin Connector 4 Park 5 Left Stop Turn 6 Right Stop Turn 57001756 1 Female Pins 2 Male Pin 3 Ground STARTING AND OPERATING 321 No d 7 Pin Connector 5 Ground 6 Left Stop Turn 7 Running Lamps OSTOOSTSS 1 Battery 2 Backup Lamps 3 Right Stop Turn 4 Electric Brakes 322 STARTING AND OPERATING M Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy traffic If using a manual transmission vehicle for trailer towing all starts must be in 1st gear to avoid excessive clutch slippage Towing Tips Automatic Transmission The D range can be selected when towing However if frequent shifting occurs while in this range the TOW HAUL feature should be selected NOTE Using the TOW HAUL feature while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will im prove performance and extend transmission life by re ducing excessive shifting and heat build up This action will also provide better engine braking The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation Refer to the Main tenance Schedule in Section 8 for proper maintenance intervals NOTE Check the automatic transmission fluid level before towing Towing Tips Tow Haul If Equipped To reduce potential
42. EJECT Button Auxiliary Mode No function TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press the TIME button to change the display from elapsed playing time to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds RW FF Auxiliary Mode No function SET Button Auxiliary Mode No function ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195 Operating Instructions Voice Recognition Dolby System VR If Equipped Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories For the radio refer to Voice Recognition System VR in Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Section 3 Dolby Laboratories For UConnect Voice Recognition System VR refer to Macrovision Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 This product incorporates copyright protection technol ogy that is protected by U S patents and other intellec tual property rights Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone UConnect If Equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect9 in SEHON unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Reverse Operating Instructions Satellite Radio Mode If engineering or disassembly is prohibited as and llite Radio in this section SLE Ee idis EOS DTS and DTS 2 0 are trademarks of Digital The Operating Instructions Video Entertainment ater Syste
43. Identification Number TIN Tire Loading And Tire Pressure Bl Tires General Information TirePressure eee Tire Inflation Pressures 0 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 237 Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation 282 W Tire Rotation Recommendations 291 Radial Ply Tires llle 283 W Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS If Compact Spare Tire If Equipped 284 Equipped se 65 444 oe ou oes br ERA 292 Limited Use Spare If Equipped 284 Base System If Equipped 295 Tire Spinning eee 285 General Information llle Tread Wear Indicators 286 ix M enn tae te eea ones ee TOP ENERO E TOT COT 286 Re oH E SEOS Replacement Tires esa painit e niitten s 287 a N ON Ede DINGS pasimit ayssi 298 Alignment And Balance 288 Beep LEGE lt Nan Bis Buel Venice es dt M ll Supplemental Tire Pressure Information If PD ee a ioo qr iis EQUIPPCO isses ere gb at Rr dra 289 Materials Added To Fuel 300 B Tire Chun soe eua r3 edes csi resas 289 Fuel System Cautions 219 5 re rd 300 aM Snow Ties 6 4254 nee EE REX a Ru 291 Carbon Monoxide Warnings 302 li Fle
44. Lever Indicator The electronic shift lever indicator is self contained within the instrument cluster It displays the position of the automatic transmission shift lever and the relation of each position to all other positions The display will place a box around the selected transmission range PRND21 If the PRNDL displays only the characters PRND21 no boxes have the system checked by an authorized dealer 15 Trip Odometer The trip odometer shows individual trip mileage To switch from odometer to trip odometer press and release the trip odometer button To reset a trip odometer display the trip odometer then push and hold the button until the display resets ap proximately two seconds The odometer will also display messages such as door ajar low wash No fuse Lo Tire display will toggle between Lo and Tire for three cycles if equipped 172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M CHAngE OIL and the outside temperature on vehicles that are not equipped with the Overhead Console with Compass Temperature Mini Trip Computer If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged GASCAP will be displayed in the instrument cluster Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the odom eter RESET button to turn the GASCAP message off If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started Change Oil Message Your vehicle is
45. Normally the OBD II system will be ready The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced recently had a dead battery or a battery replace ment If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD II system is ready you must do the following 1 Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch 2 Turn the ignition to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine 3 If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 4 As soon as you turn your key to the ON position you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 355 5 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen a The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station b The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station If your OBD II system is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility
46. O Boxes e Service Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintaining servicing and repairing Chrysler LLC vehicles A complete working knowledge of the ve hicle system and or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations diagrams and charts e Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia grams charts and detailed illustrations These practi cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled ve hicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by step troubleshooting and drivability procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment Owner s Manuals These Owner s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific Chrysler LLC vehicles Included are starting operating emergency and main tenance procedures as well as specifications capabili ties and safety tips 422 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M Call toll free at e 1 800 890 4038 U S e 1 800 387 1143 Canada Or Visit us on the Worldwide Web at e www techauthority com DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading catego
47. SET speed If the vehicle speed drops below 25 mph 40 km h the Electronic Speed Control will automatically disengage If this happens you can push down on the accelerator pedal to maintain the desired speed Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission may exhibit several downshifts under the above conditions To reduce the frequency of the downshifts and to im prove vehicle performance it is advisable to lock out OVERDRIVE by pressing the TOW HAUL button lo cated at the end of the shift lever ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 WARNING Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed Your ve hicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control An accident could be the result Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery OVERHEAD CONSOLE 81471171 The overhead console has the following features Overhead Console e Courtesy Lights e Garage Door Opener if equipped e Compass Temperature Mini Irip Computer if equipped 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Courtesy Reading Lights Near the front of the console are two courtesy reading lights Both lights illuminate as courtesy lights when a door is opened when the dimmer control is rotated to the courtesy light position fully upward position or when the UNLOCK button is pressed on
48. Seat 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and belts are designed to go around the large bones of adjust the seat your body These are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of a collision the best Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in a collision much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of part of the belt Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your pas sengers safe too Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in an accident hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size Pulling Out Belt and Latch Plate 2 The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front seat next to your arm in the rear seat Grasp the latch THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 plate and pull out the belt Slide the latch plate up the 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around plate into the buckle until you hear a click your lap Le m NINE 2 e A belt buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you A belt that is too loose will not protect yo
49. Signals en geese ae ns 127 168 387 389 UConnect Hands Free Phone 82 Underhood Fuses 000 eee 381 Uniform Tire Quality Grades 422 Universal Transmitter 0 00000000 142 Unlock Auto 2 ee 31 Utility Rails Rear Cargo Area 155 Variance Compass 106 4 28 obese eee 141 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 6 Vehicle Loading sisir srecen entier na 277 308 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 7 Vehicle Storage ce csece RR RR Ee RE 386 Voice Recognition System VR 110 44 INDEX M Warning Lights Instrument Cluster Description ssa rk RR Re 168 Warnings and Cautions 04 4 6 Warranty Information 419 Washers Windshield 131 Washing Vehicle km eere Ege eua es 377 Water Driving Through 00008 264 Weight Load Carrying sec cross kitetama as 308 Wheel Alignment and Balance 288 Wheel and Wheel Trim 00 378 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care 378 Wheel Ch ngmg 2 23 somes is PRESE 332 Wheel Mounting 0000200000 337 Wheel Nut Torque 0 00000 341 Wind Buffeting sese RR aes 35 Window Fogging 0 02 ee eee eae 232 Windows esee tas 4 Grae VIT aoe ee Fhe acre ns 34 R at Sliding 4 0 445 memes Rx edem 156 Windshield Defroster 00006 230 Windshield Washers
50. Time ET This display shows the accumulated ignition ON time since the last reset Resetting the Elapsed Time will cause the display to change to zero C T Button Use the C T Compass Temperature button to select a EN readout of the outside temperature and one of eight compass headings that indicate the direction in which the vehicle is facing 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 81473657 C T Button Global Reset If the RESET button is pressed twice within two seconds while in any of the three resettable displays AVG ECO ODO ET the GLOBAL RESET will reset all three displays Compass Temperature Display WARNING Even if the display still reads a few degrees above 32 F 0 C the road surface may be icy particularly in woods or on bridges Drive carefully under such conditions to prevent an accident and possible per sonal injury or property damage Automatic Compass Calibration This compass is self calibrating which eliminates the need to manually set the compass When the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the CAL symbol will be displayed After completing one 360 degree turn with the vehicle traveling less than 5 mph 8 km h in an area free from large metal or metallic objects the CAL symbol will turn off and the compass will function normally ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 NOTE Magnetic materials should be kept away from the Overhead Cons
51. US Rue alee Ram RU e Ore ie RR RV Sie ea RUN ane 6 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE eccles mmn 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE eee mnn 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL eee eeeeeeeee eee hh nn 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 2 2c cc eer cece rece rr cere were eee hh hh mnn e WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 2 cece cece cree cree cence hh hh s hh nnn 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 4449954599499 9399 494 9o dva e de yp e ees 8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 5529999499 e adea v e dew TR r3 EY VR es SS 9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE cece cece cece cece hh hh hn 10 INDEX 4 994m a em CR as oar Re 3 3 409 93 98 903 403 409903 9 UP d nie QR 4 ed oe He wd INTRODUCTION CONTENTS E Introduction 0 0 0000000000 4 Bl Vehicle Identification Number 6 Bl How To Use This Manual 4 Bl Vehicle Modifications Alterations 7 Bl Warnings And Cautions 004 6 4 INTRODUCTION M INTRODUCTION This Owner s Manual has been prepared with the assis tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and various customer oriented documents You are urged to read these publications carefully Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation o
52. WHERE IT WAS BEFORE THE RESET The reset value is based on a minimal amount of fuel used and the distance traveled from the previous drive cycle The display may take several miles kilometers for this value to change de pending upon driving habits Distance To Empty DTE Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank The estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy according to the current fuel tank level NOTE The DTE is not resettable When Distance To Empty LOW FUEL the fuel gauge pointer will initially be on the red E marker At this ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 point fuel gauge pointer on the red E marker there is reserve fuel capacity which corresponds to approxi mately 8 of tank volume This reserve capacity was put in place to prevent the likelihood of customers running out of fuel when operating at maximum load conditions in areas where there aren t many gas stations NOTE The Distance To Empty will remain equal to zero until the vehicle runs out of fuel or is refueled Trip Odometer ODO This display shows the distance traveled since the last reset NOTE The maximum value is 6000 miles 9656 km approximately Resetting of this screen will cause the trip odometer to change to zero Then the trip odometer must be reset in order to update the trip odometer miles Elapsed
53. a result of tire and wheel out of balance Proper balancing will reduce vibration and avoid tire cupping and spotty wear SUPPLEMENTAL TIRE PRESSURE INFORMATION IF EQUIPPED A light load vehicle condition is defined as two passen gers 150 lbs 68 kg each plus 200 Ibs 91 kg of cargo Cold tire inflation pressures for a lightly loaded vehicle will be found on the face of the driver s door TIRE CHAINS CAUTION The use of chains is permitted only on vehicles equipped with P245 70R16 tires Use only Class S chains or other traction aids that meet SAE Type S specifications Tire chain use is permitted only on the rear tires Chains must be the proper size for the vehicle as recommended by the chain manufacturer CAUTION To avoid damage to your vehicle tires or chains observe the following precautions Continued CAUTION Continued e Because of limited chain clearance between tires and other suspension components it is important that only chains in good condition are used Bro ken chains can cause serious vehicle damage Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could suggest chain breakage Remove the damaged parts of the chain before further use Install chains as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about 1 2 mile 0 8 km Do not exceed 45 mph 72 km h Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps especially with a loaded vehicle Do not install tir
54. a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds Do not go faster than road conditions permit 254 STARTING AND OPERATING ME For additional information on the appropriate use of each transfer case mode position refer to the following infor mation 2WD The 2 Wheel Drive Rear Wheel Drive High Range is used for normal street and highway driving on dry hard surfaced roads 4WD LOCK The 4 Wheel Drive Lock 4WD LOCK Range locks the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed This range provides additional traction for loose or slippery road surfaces only 4WD LOW The 4 Wheel Drive Low 4WD LOW Range provides low speed 4 wheel drive It locks the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed This range provides additional traction and maximum pulling power for loose or slip pery road surfaces only Do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h N The NEUTRAL Range disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain NEUTRAL is used for flat towing behind another vehicle Refer to Recreational Towing in Section 5 en STARTING AND OPERATING 255 Shifting Procedure NV233 243 Transfer Case 81977fda NOTE If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case position have not been met the transfer case will not shift the indicator light for the previous position will remain ON and the newly s
55. access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer s service contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s service contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about the service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract National Customer Hot line at 1 800 521 9922 The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s service contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s service contract If you purchased a ser vice contract that is not a manufacturer s service contract and you require service after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires please refer to the contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents 426 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle An authorized dealer WARNING has also made a major investment in facilities tools and Engine exhaust some of its constituents and cer
56. amp filter 1 Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing 1 Replace the accessory drive belt s Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 414 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ME 126 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires C1 Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if you are using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing 126 000 Miles 210 000 km or 132 000 Miles 220 000 km or 132 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires d If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary 1 Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary 138 000 Miles 230 000 km or 138 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chry
57. and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability To reduce this possibility the following precau tions should be observed 1 Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are slushy 2 Slow down if road has standing water or puddles 3 Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become visible 4 Keep tires properly inflated 5 Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the car in front to avoid a collision in a sudden stop 264 STARTING AND OPERATING Se DRIVING THROUGH WATER Driving through water more than a few inches centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle Flowing Rising Water WARNING Do not drive on or cross a road or a path where water is flowing and or rising as in storm run off Flowing water can wear away the road or path s surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water Furthermore flowing and or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you Shallow Standing Water Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow standing water consider the following Caution and Warning before doing so CAUTION e Always check the depth of the standing water before driving through it Never drive through standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
58. and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing Flashing NEUTRAL position indicator light indicates that shift requirements have not been met ee STARTING AND OPERATING 327 CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the trans mission is shifted into PARK with the transfer case in NEUTRAL and the engine running With the transfer case in NEUTRAL ensure that the engine is off prior to shifting the transmission into PARK Returning to Normal Operation Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for normal usage 1 Reconnect the negative battery cable 2 The vehicle must be at a complete stop 3 Place the ignition key in the OFF position if it has been moved or the engine has been started 4 Place ignition key in the ON position engine off 5 Depress brake pedal 6 Shift automatic transmission into NEUTRAL or de press clutch on manual transmission 7 Using the point of a ballpoint pen or similar object depress the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL button for 1 second 8 After the NEUTRAL indicator light turns off release the NEUTRAL button 9 After the NEUTRAL button has been released the transfer case will shift to the position identified by the selector switch 10 Start the engine Shift the automatic transmission into DRIVE or place the manual transmission in 1st gear and momentarily release the clutch to verify that the transfer case has engaged 11 Set parking brak
59. are shown in bold face and are underlined 81c6bf7b 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Y at a time Voice Tree Phonebook New Entry Enter Name Enter Location Enter Location Current Number is played Enter New Number Entry is modified Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 81c6bf80 Enter Number Entry Deleted Phonebook Cleared New Entry Added UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 Select a language English Espanol or Francais Select phone io be deleted Enter Name of phone and follow L prompts to complete pairing System Lists Phanes Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined DERSEAD 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Voice Commands Voice Commands Primary Alternate s Primary Alternate s Zero call one cancel two confirmation prompts three continue four delete five dial six download seven edit eight emergency nine English star erase all plus Espanol pound Francais add location help all home ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 Voice Commands Voice Commands Primary Alternate s Primary Alternate s language return to main menu return or main menu list names select pho
60. case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing oo M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 408 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ee 66 000 Miles 110 000 km or 72 000 Miles 120 000 km or 72 Months Maintenance Service 66 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule T Change the engine oil and engine oil filter T Change the engine oil and engine oil Q Rotate tires filter 1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the T Rotate tires engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary d Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary J Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if you are using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Inspect the CV joints Inspect the exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary ood M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 409 78 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine
61. clicking noise These occurrences are normal and indicate that the system is functioning properly The ABS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others 272 STARTING AND OPERATING TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire Markings 1 US DOT Safety Stan dards Code TIN 2 Size Designation 3 Service Description 4 Maximum Load 5 Maximum Pressure 6 Treadwear Traction and Temperature Grades NOTE P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example P215 65R15 95H European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LT Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced ing the size
62. control buttons for the Electronic Speed Control are located on the steering wheel When engaged the Elec tronic Speed Control takes over the accelerator operation at speeds greater than 25 mph 40 km h 1 Resume 2 Cancel 3 Decel Electronic Speed Control Buttons 4 Set 5 Cruise 6 On Off ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 To Activate Push the ON OFF button to the ON position In the instrument cluster the word CRUISE illuminates to indicate that the system is on NOTE The Electronic Speed Control has been designed to shut down if multiple speed control buttons i e SET and CANCEL are operated simultaneously in order to ensure proper operation The Electronic Speed Control can be reactivated by pushing the speed control ON OFF button and reestablishing the desired vehicle SET speed To Set At A Desired Speed When the vehicle has reached the desired speed press and release the SET button Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal normal braking or pressing the CANCEL button will deactivate the speed control without erasing the memory Pushing the ON OFF but ton to the OFF position or turning off the ignition erases the memory WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control ON when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the Electronic Speed Control to cause it to go
63. correct fluid type Transfer Case Inspect the transfer case for fluid leaks If a fluid leak is evident the transfer case fluid level may be low Have the transfer case serviced immediately Damage may result from operation of the vehicle with low transfer case fluid Drain and Refill Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the proper maintenance intervals Lubricant Selection Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type iin Drain and Refill Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the proper maintenance intervals NOTE The presence of water in the gear lubricant will result in corrosion and possible failure of differential 376 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M components Operation of the vehicle in water as may be encountered in some off highway types of service will require draining and refilling the axle to avoid damage Lubricant Selection Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type Rear Axle Rear axle limited slip differentials require the use of MOPAR limited slip additive Refer to Fluids Lubri cants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type This should be added to the gear lubricant whenever a fluid change is made when equipped with limited slip differential Rear axle fluid level should be 1 4 in 64 mm below filler plug for 8 1 4 in and 9 1 4 in a
64. d denied Wasa dori 387 High Beam iuis eR gad fete sods 128 High Beam Low Beam Select Switch 128 Lights On Reminder sss 126 PASSING xt nh ne gue ee de bed olen rs 128 SWItCDi 4 5 doe hien e eee RE PES 125 Heated Seats 0 0 0 ee eee 120 Heater Engine Block 00000 241 High Beam Indicator 00006 169 High Beam Low Beam Select Dimmer Switch 128 Hitches Trailer Towing 0 eee 315 Holder Cup see S48 ahaa ERES 150 HomeLink Garage Door Opener Transmitter 142 Hood Release creme eee en 121 Ignition Key bah oa Set oe bee ee iag ae Ro XO 12 Illuminated Entty ecce 20 Immobilizer Sentry Key lisse 16 Infant Restraint llle 58 Inflation Pressure Tires 0000050 289 Inside Rearview Mirror lees 80 Instrument Cluster 2 2 2 eee 168 Instrument Panel and Controls 166 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 380 Interior Appearance Care 0000 379 Interior Lights 2 0 eee eosa ses 123 en INDEX 435 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 130 Introduction 4i 54563 ERG Rede ee 4 Jack Operation s etesse ee ga be 332 337 Jacking Instructions 00 338 Key Programming mean seein at aie a beat are RO RD 17 Key Replacement 2 0 tss icei RR RE 17 Key Sentry Immobilizer 0 16 Keyless Entry System Lesen ihre hess en 21 Keys
65. designation Example LT235 85R16 Temporary spare tires are high pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only ee STARTING AND OPERATING 273 Tires designed to this standard have the letter I e High flotation tire sizing is based on U S design molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded tion Example T145 80D18 103M into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE Size Designation P Passenger Car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger Car tire based on European design standards LT Light Truck tire based on U S design standards T Temporary spare tire 31 Overall diameter in inches in 215 Section width in millimeters mm 65 Aspect ratio in percent Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section width in inches in R Construction code R means radial construction D means diagonal or bias construction 274 STARTING AND OPERATING M EXAMPLE 15 Rim diameter in inches in Service Description 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should onl
66. entries es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91 from the list press the Voice Recognition button e The UConnect system will ask you to verify that you while the UConnect system is playing the desired wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook entry and say Delete After confirmation the phonebook entries will be e After you enter the name the UConnect system will deleted ei yon mod Du DN e Eee ns Note that only the phonebook in the current language work mobile pager or all Say the designation you is deleted wish to delete Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited e Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be Bish ae Names an dre U Contec Phe Danis deleted or edited e Press the PHONE button to begin e Note that only the phonebook entry in the current language is deleted Delete Erase All UConnect Phonebook Entries e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Press the PHONE button to begin LE e The UConnect system will play the names of all the phonebook entries including the downloaded phone book entries if available e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Erase All 92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To call one of the names in the list press the Voice Recognition button during the playing of the desired name and say Call NOTE The user can also exercise
67. equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The CHAngE OIL message will flash in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately 12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the Trip Odometer button on the instrument cluster To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance refer to the fol lowing procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure 16 Odometer The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven U S federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven There fore if the odometer reading is changed during repair or replacement be sure to keep a record o
68. five 150 Ib 68 kg passengers in your vehicle the amount of 278 STARTING AND OPERATING ME available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 Ibs 295 kg since 5 x 150 750 and 1400 750 650 Ibs 295 kg 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle NOTE The following table shows examples on how to calcu late total load cargo luggage and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 Ibs 392 kg ee STARTING AND OPERATING 279 Occupants Combined weight of AVAILABLE TOTAL FRONT REAR occupants and cargo MINUS Combined Occupant s Cargo Luggage and from Tire Placard weight Trailer Tongue Weight EXAMPLE 4 Occupant 1 200 Ibs 195 Ibs Occupant 1 210 lbs Occupant 2 180 Ibs Occupant 3 150 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 ibs 540 Ibs 325 Ibs
69. for automatic transmission overheat ing turn the TOW HAUL feature ON when driving in hilly areas or shift the transmission to Drive position 2 on more severe grades Towing Tips Electronic Speed Control If Equipped Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads es STARTING AND OPERATING 323 When using the speed control if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until you can resume cruising speed Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency Towing Tips Cooling System To reduce potential for engine and transmission over heating take the following actions City Driving When stopped for short periods of time put transmission in NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed Highway Driving Reduce speed Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily SNOWPLOW Snow plows winches and other aftermarket equipment should not be added to the front end of your vehicle The airbag crash sensors may be affected by the change in the front end structure The airbags could deploy unexpect edly or could fail to deploy during a collision WARNING Do not add a snow plow winches or any other aftermarket equipment to the front of your vehicle This could adversely affect the functioning of the airbag system and you could be injured 324 STARTING AND OPERATING Se usu ec MOTORHOME ETC CAUTION Continued e The transfer c
70. hydraulic system loses normal capability the remaining system will still function with some loss of braking effectiveness This will be evident by increased pedal travel during application greater pedal force required to slow or stop and activation of the Brake Warning light and the ABS light during brake use Rear Wheel Anti Lock Brake System ABS If Equipped The Rear Wheel ABS provides increased vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking conditions The system automatically controls the operation of the rear brakes to prevent rear wheel lockup The ABS remains operational in the 4 wheel drive mode The level of performance is reduced when the front brakes are locked up This will cause the rear brakes to lock up through the drivetrain which may reduce the effectiveness of the anti lock system During severe braking conditions particularly with changing road surfaces such as ice to concrete a slight drop or minor pulsation may be felt in the brake pedal 270 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING Both Anti Lock Brake Systems contain sophisticated electronic equipment It may be susceptible to inter ference caused by improperly installed or high out put radio transmitting equipment This interference can cause possible loss of anti lock braking capabil ity Installation of such equipment should be done by qualified professionals Four Wheel Anti Lock Brake System ABS 4 Wheel ABS is designed to aid t
71. im proved braking will occur during steady braking The TOW HAUL light will illuminate in the instrument cluster to indicate when the switch has been activated Pressing the switch a second time restores normal opera tion If the TOW HAUL mode is desired the switch must be pressed each time the engine is started Torque Converter Clutch A feature designed to improve fuel economy is included in all automatic transmissions A clutch within the torque converter engages automatically at a calibrated speed at light throttle It engages at higher speeds under heavier acceleration This may result in a slightly differ ent feeling or response during normal operation in high gear When the vehicle speed drops below a calibrated speed or during acceleration the clutch automatically and smoothly disengages The feature is operational in Overdrive and in Drive NOTE The torque converter clutch will not engage until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm usually after 1 3 miles 1 6 4 8 km of driving Because the engine speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is not engaged it may seem as if the transmission is not shifting into Overdrive when cold This is normal Pressing the TOW HAUL switch when the transmission is sufficiently warm will demonstrate that the transmis sion is able to shift into and out of Overdrive NOTE If the vehicle has not been driven in several days the first few seconds of operati
72. improve performance on ice skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non studded tires Some states pro hibit studded tires therefore local laws should be checked before using these tire types TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering driving and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates and tend to develop irregular wear pat terns These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to main tain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride 292 STARTING AND OPERATING ER Zt cu XE OSST Follow the recommended tire rotation frequency for your type of driving found in the Maintenance Schedules section of this manual More frequent rotation is permis sible if desired The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being per formed TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS IF EQUIPPED The Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure the placard is lo cated on the driver s side B pillar The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
73. installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly 178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera tion or sensor damage may result when using re placement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result 23 Airbag Warning Light The airbag warning light will illuminate and 9 remain lit for six to eight seconds when the S ignition is first turned ON If the light does not illuminate when the ignition is first turned ON or the light stays on or comes on while driving have the airbag system checked by an authorized dealer 24 4WD Indicator The 4WD indicator illuminates when the transfer case is in 4WD position 25 SVC Service 4WD Indicator The SVC 4WD illuminates when the ignition key is turned to the ON position and will stay on for two seconds If the light
74. is switched to OFF a call can continue on the UConnect system for a certain dura tion after which the call is automatically transferred from the UConnect system to the mobile phone ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 e An active call is automatically transferred to the mobile phone after the ignition key is switched to OFF UConnect System Features Language Selection To change the language that the UConnect system is using e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the language you wish to switch to English Espanol or Francais e Continue to follow the system prompts to complete language selection After selecting one of the languages all prompts and voice commands will be in that language NOTE After every UConnect language change opera tion only the language specific 32 name phonebook is usable The paired phone name is not language specific and usable across all languages Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is reachable e Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area If the phone is not reachable and the UConnect system is operational you may reach the emergency number as follows e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Emergency and the UConnect system will instruct 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURE
75. key must be ON for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable If the key is not ON then the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing NV 244 Generation Il Transfer Case Operating Information Precautions The NV 244 Generation II is an electric shift transfer case and is operated by the 4WD Control Switch which is located on the instrument panel The NV 244 Generation II transfer case provides four mode positions Normal four wheel drive 4WD high range 4 wheel drive lock AWD LOCK 4 wheel drive low 4WD LOW range and NEUTRAL This transfer case is equipped with an inter axle differ ential that allows driving the vehicle in the normal all wheel drive position 4WD at all times on any given road surface including dry hard surfaced roads The 4WD mode allows the front and rear wheels to rotate at different speeds This eliminates driveline binding and component wear normally associated with driving the vehicle in the 4WD LOCK position on dry hard surfaced 258 STARTING AND OPERATING M roads This feature provides the safety security and convenience of operating in all wheel drive at all times regardless of road conditions When additional traction is required the 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions can be used to lock the front and rear driveshafts together through the transfer case inter axle differential and force the front and rear wheels to rot
76. names nmm e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension mm e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 WMA files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times 192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M If a disc contains multi formats such as CD audio and MP3 WMA tracks the radio will only play the MP3 WMA tracks on that disc Supported MP3 WMA File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 WMA extension as MP3 WMA files Non MP3 WMA files named with the MP3 WMA extension may cause play back problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 WMA and will not play the file When using the MP3 WMA encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 WMA file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 WMA files use a 44 1 KHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Sampling Fre Specification quency KHz Bit Rate kbps 320 256 224 MPEG 1 Audio 192 160 128
77. not remain in the vehicle Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic when the vehicle is being jacked transmission in PARK a manual transmission in REVERSE Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack Only use the jack in the positions indicated and Continued for lifting this vehicle during a tire change Continued Instructions WARNING Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 339 2 Using the wheel wrench loosen but do not remove Y 7 7 7 WARNING Continued the wheel nuts by turning them counterclockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the ground If working on or near a roadway be extremely careful of motor traffic 3 When changing a front wheel place the jack under the frame rail behind the wheel Locate the jack as far forward as possible on the straight part of the frame prior to inboard transition as shown Operate the jack using the jack drive tube and the wheel wrench the tube extension may be used but is not required To assure that spare tires flat or inflated are securely stowed spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground Turn on the Hazard warning flasher A ii r a Jack Warning Label 1 Lower and remove the spare wheel jack and
78. not toys and should not be played with and never leave your child unattended in the vehicle WARNING Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt The passenger seat belts are equipped with either cinch ing latch plates or automatic locking retractors which are designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child restraint so that it should not be necessary to use a locking clip If the seat belt has a cinching latch plate pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap shoulder belt will tighten the belt The cinching latch plate will keep the belt tight however any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary If the seat belt has an automatic locking retractor it will have a distinctive label Pull the belt from the retractor until there is enough to allow you to pass through the child restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle Then pull the belt until it is fully extended from the retractor Allow the belt to return to the retractor pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap portion about the child restraint For automatic 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE locking retr
79. on your vehicle The bumper face bar will be damaged e Do not disconnect the rear driveshaft because fluid will leak from the transfer case and damage internal parts WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS Bl Hazard Warning Flasher 332 H Changing A Hat Tire 2 nen 332 Jack Location eiert asyan meua DE a 332 Removing The Spare Tire 334 Tire Changing Procedure 337 Preparations ac au oui eR eer 337 Instructions 2 llle 338 To Stow The Flat Or Spare a Jump Starting sc uci vere spe ERE n H Freeing A Stuck Vehicle Lsse ll Emergency Tow Hooks If Equipped E Towing A Disabled Vehicle Four Wheel Drive Vehicles Two Wheel Drive Vehicles 332 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME HAZARD WARNING FLASHER The Hazard Warning Flasher switch is located on the top of the steering column just behind the steering wheel Hazard Warning Flasher Switch Press the switch and all front and rear directional signals will flash intermittently Press the switch a second time to turn off the emergency flashers This is an emergency warning system and should not be used when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for servic
80. one for the best interaction with the front airbag e The Side Impact SRS Window Bags are designed to activate only in certain side collisions When the ORC with side impact option detects a collision requiring the window bags to inflate it signals the inflators on the crash side of the vehicle A quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the window bag The inflating ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 If a Deployment Occurs The airbag system is designed to deploy the airbags when the impact sensors detect a moderate to severe frontal collision to help restrain the driver and front passenger and then immediately deflate NOTE A frontal collision that is not severe enough to need airbag protection will not activate the system This does not mean something is wrong with the airbag system If you do have a collision that deploys the airbags any or all of the following may occur e The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra sions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke like
81. out of PARK WARNING e Always fully apply the parking brake when leav ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or injury Also be certain to leave an automatic transmission in PARK a manual transmission in REVERSE or 1st gear Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury emm Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving Parking Brake unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Do not leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle Be sure the parking brake is firmly set when parked and the shift lever is in the PARK position automatic trans mission or REVERSE or 1st gear manual transmission When parking on a hill you should apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise ee STARTING AND OPERATING 269 When parking on a hill turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade The parking brake should be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle BRAKE SYSTEM In the event power assist is lost for any reason for example repeated brake applications with the engine off the brakes will still function The effort required to brake the vehicle will be significantly more than that required with the power system operating If either the front or rear
82. particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufac turer s instructions for cleaning It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the airbags have deployed If you are involved in another collision the airbags will not be in place to protect you 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING Maintaining Your Airbag System Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot WARNING protect you in another collision Have the airbags and both front seat belt retractor assemblies w pretensioners replaced by an authorized dealer as soon as possible e Modifications to any part of the airbag system could cause it to fail when you need it You could be injured if the airbag system is not there to protect you Do not modify the components or wiring including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel Do not modify the front bumper vehicle body structure or add aftermarket side steps or running boards You need proper knee impact protection in a collision Do not m
83. phonebook low road noise 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e smooth road surface e fully closed windows e dry weather conditions and e operation from the driver s seat e Performance such as audio clarity echo and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network and not the UConnect system e Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering the in vehicle audio volume e In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Bluetooth Communication Link Cellular phones have been found to lose connection to the UConnect system When this happens the connec tion can generally be re established by switching the phone off on Your cell phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth ON mode Power Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either ON or ACC position or after a language change you must wait at least five seconds prior to using the system UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 Voice Tree Main Menu Redial Towing Emergency En9lish Phonebook edia e mergenc Espanol oneboo Francais Last Enter Number Number on Phone is redialed See Phonebook Flowchart See Setup Flowchart The 32 name language specific phonebook will be used The phones paired are available across all languages Number associated Number with entry is Dialed is dialed Note Available Voice commands
84. position and if you are taller than average you ll prefer a higher position When you release the anchorage try to move it up or down to make sure that it is locked in the desired position Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 The adjuster has an easy up EZ Up feature which will allow it to be moved up without engaging the button Automatic Locking Retractors ALR Mode If Equipped In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt The automatic locking mode is avail able on all passenger seating positions with a combina tion lap shoulder belt When to Use the Automatic Locking Mode Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety seat is installed in a passenger seating position Children 12 years old and younger should be properly restrained in the rear seat whenever possible How to Use the Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap shoulder belt 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is fully extended 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode How to Disengage the Automatic Locking Mode To disengage the Automatic Locking Mode disconnect the combination lap shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely The vehicl
85. programming BeltAlert can be reactivated by repeating this procedure NOTE Although the BeltAlert has been deactivated the Seat Belt Warning Light will continue to illuminate while the driver s seat belt remains unbuckled Seat Belts And Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use seat belts throughout their pregnancies Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug against the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended your authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough When it is not required remove the extender and store it 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision Only use the seat belt extender when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating positions Remove and store the extender when not needed Driver And Right Front Passenger Supplemental Restraint System SRS Airbags This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and right front passenger as a supplement to
86. reception do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location or strap items to the trunk lid around the trunk lid antenna if equipped Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance Larger lug gage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223 as possible within the loading design of the rack Do not place items directly on or above the antenna Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons e The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes e Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception e Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage Operating Instructions Satellite Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next channel in Satellite mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass channels without stopping until you release it SCAN Button When Equipped Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next c
87. result in damage to the vehicle Required Maintenance Intervals NOTE Vehicles built with the 4 7L engine are equipped with sixteen spark plugs one set is located on the top of the engine under the coils and the second set is located on the side of the engine The spark plugs located under the coils are a standard plug and must be changed every 30 000 miles 50 000 km The spark plugs located on the side of the engine are a premium plug and must be changed every 102 000 miles 170 000 km ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 6 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 1 Rotate tires 6 000 Miles 10 000 km or Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 12 000 Miles 20 000 km or 12 Months Maintenance Service Schedule a mi mi Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Perform the first inspection at 12 000 miles 20 000 km or 12 months Inspect the exhaust system Perform the first inspection at 12 000 miles 20 000 km or 12 months Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 403 M A N T E
88. song titles for each file Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when ignition is OFF 220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone UConnect If Equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 Operating Instructions Satellite Radio Mode If Equipped Refer to Satellite Radio in this section SOUND BOX OPERATION The Sound Box includes one subwoofer two tweeters and lights that pulsate with the music The lights can be turned off on constantly or pulse with the beat of the music To control the lights select one of the following three positions Sound Box
89. station e PREVIOUS STATION to select the previous station e RADIO MENU to switch to the radio menu e MAIN MENU to switch to the main menu Satellite Radio To switch to satellite radio mode say SAT or SATELLITE RADIO In this mode you may say the following com mands e CHANNEL NUMBER to change the channel by its spoken number e NEXT CHANNEL to select the next channel e PREVIOUS CHANNEL to select the previous chan nel e LIST CHANNEL to hear a list of available channels e SELECT NAME to say the name of a channel e RADIO MENU to switch to the radio menu e MAIN MENU to switch to the main menu Disc To switch to the disc mode say DISC In this mode you may say the following commands e TRACK to change the track e NEXT TRACK to play the next track e PREVIOUS TRACK to play the previous track e MAIN MENU to switch to the main menu 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Memo To switch to the voice recorder mode say MEMO In this mode you may say the following commands e NEW MEMO to record a new memo During the recording you may press the VR hard key to stop recording You proceed by saying one of the following commands SAVE to save the memo CONTINUE to continue recording DELETE to delete the recording e PLAY MEMOS to play previously recorded memos During the playback you may press the VR hard key to stop playing memos You proceed by sayin
90. tained immediately when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic testing or for prolonged periods during very rough idling or malfunctioning operating conditions 366 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cooling System WARNING You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot Engine Coolant Checks Check the engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant anti freeze Check the front of the A C condenser and radiator for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser and radiator Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub ber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connection at the bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks With the engine at normal operating temperature but not running che
91. than normal may require special precautions All installations should be checked for possible interfer ence between the communications equipment and the vehicle s electronic systems B 2 gt 3 amp p 326 0934 s 81 LS gt
92. the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter if so equipped These lights are also operated individually as reading lights by pressing the recessed area of the corresponding lens NOTE The courtesy reading lights will remain on until the switch is pressed a second time so be sure they have been turned off before leaving the vehicle If the interior lights are left on after the vehicle is turned OFF they will extinguish after approximately 10 minutes COMPASS TEMPERATURE MINI TRIP COMPUTER This feature allows you to choose between a compass temperature display and one of four trip conditions being monitored es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 US M Button RESET Button Use the US M button to change the display from U S to Use the RESET button to reset the following displays metric measurement units e Average Fuel Economy e Trip Odometer e Elapsed time 81473559 US M Button 814735c6 RESET Button 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M STEP Button Use the STEP button to choose or cycle through the four trip conditions 8147363a STEP Button Average Fuel Economy AVG ECO Displays the average fuel economy since the last reset Average fuel economy is a running average of the amount of fuel used and the distance the vehicle has traveled When the fuel economy is reset the display will momentarily blank the history will be erased and the AVERAGE WILL CONTINUE FROM
93. the center of the instrument panel al If you do not purposefully turn the switch off the seat heating level will automatically change to the next lower level or off Both the high and low heat levels operate for approximately 30 minutes The heated seat will also turn off when the ignition is turned OFF Both indicators on identifies high heat level The lower indicator on identifies Low heat level Flashing indicator lights on the switch indicate that the Heated Seat system needs servicing Press the desired switch once to obtain high heat level Press the switch a second time to obtain low heat level A third button press will turn off the heated seat E UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD 1 WARNING To open the hood two latches must be released e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use ex haustion or other physical condition must exercise 1 First pull the hood release lever located under the left side of the instrument panel care when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion This may cause the seat heater to overheat Hood Release Lever Location 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 2 Then
94. the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed maintenance intervals there are other items that should operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance However if a malfunction of these items does occur it could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance These items should be inspected if a malfunction is observed or suspected Engine Oil Checking Oil Level To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle s engine the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed up engine is shut off or before starting the engine after it has sat overnight ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 357 Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Always maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the dipstick Adding one quart liter of oil when the reading is at the bottom of the SAFE zone will result in a reading at the top of the safe zone on these engines CAUTION Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engi
95. this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into pushbutton memory The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 Satellite stations 226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone lf Equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped Refer to separate Video Entertainment System VES Guide REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS IF EQUIPPED The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel Reach behind the wheel to access the switches 145003751 Remote Sound System Controls The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a push button in the center Pressing the top of the switch will increase the volume and pressing the bottom of the switch will decrease the volume The button located in the center of the right hand control will switch modes to Radio or CD ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227 The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a push button in
96. tion Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading WARNING and cold tire inflation pressures WARNING Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The instability could cause an accident Al ways use radial ply tires in sets of four or six in case of trucks with dual rear wheels Never combine them with other types of tires High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi mum load is dangerous The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious accident Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in 75 mph 120 km h the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consult your authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs 284 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Compact Spare Tire If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with radial tires It is engineered to be used on your style vehicle only Since this tire has limited tread life the original tire should be repaired or replaced and rein stalled at the first opportunity WARNING e Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use only With these tires DO NOT drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Temporary use spare tires have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indica tors t
97. to do so may result in an accident causing serious injury or death ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 When you press the VR hard key you will hear a beep The beep is your signal to give a command NOTE If you do not say a command within a few seconds the system will present you with a list of options If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists options press the VR hard key listen for the beep and say your command Pressing the VR hard key while the system is speaking is known as barging in The system will be interrupted and after the beep you can add or change commands This will become helpful once you start to learn the options NOTE Atany time you can say the words CANCEL HELP or MAIN MENU These commands are universal and can be used from any menu All other commands can be used depending upon the active application For example if you are in the disc menu and you are listening to FM radio you can speak commands from the disc menu or from the FM radio menu When using this system you should speak clearly and at a normal speaking volume The system will best recognize your speech if the win dows are closed and the heater air conditioning fan is set to low At any point if the system does not recognize one of your commands you will be prompted to repeat it To hear the first available Menu press the VR hard key and say HELP or MAIN MENU 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FE
98. to failure of an infant or child restraint It could come loose in a collision The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions ex actly when installing an infant or child restraint Continued e A rearward facing infant restraint should only be used in a rear seat of a vehicle that does not have an airbag off switch A rearward facing infant restraint in the front seat may be struck by a deploying passenger airbag which may cause se vere or fatal injury to the infant Here are some tips for getting the most out of your child restraint Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards The manufacturer recommends that you try a child restraint in the vehicle seats where you will use it before you buy it The restraint must be appropriate for your child s weight and height Check the label on the restraint for weight and height limits ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 e Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint If you install the restraint improperly it may not work when you need it e The Extended Cab first and Club Crew Cab second row outside seating positions have cinching latch plates These are designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip If the seat belt has a cinching latch plate pulling
99. to the ON position and back to LOCK position a minimum of four times ending in the LOCK position Do not start the engine 5 Within 30 seconds press the driver s door LOCK switch in the LOCK direction 6 Asingle chime will be heard to indicate the feature has been disabled 7 To reactivate this feature repeat the above Steps 8 If a chime is not heard program mode was canceled before the feature could be disabled If necessary repeat the above procedure Auto Unlock On Exit Feature If Equipped This feature unlocks all of the doors of the vehicle when any door is opened This will occur only after the vehicle has been shifted into the PARK position after the vehicle has been driven shifted out of PARK and the doors closed Auto Unlock Feature Programming The Customer Programming sequence to disable or en able Auto Unlock 1 Enter your vehicle and close all the doors 2 Fasten your seat belt Fastening the seat belt will cancel any chiming that may be confusing during this programming procedure 3 Insert the key into the ignition 4 Within 15 seconds cycle the key from the LOCK position to the ON position and back to LOCK position a minimum of four times ending in the LOCK position Do not start the engine 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M 5 Within 30 seconds press the driver s door LOCK switch in the UNLOCK direction 6 A single chime will sound to indicate the fea
100. up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station in AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies pausing for five seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time Voice Recognition Button UConnect Hands Free Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Hands Free Phone UConnect feature if equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With UConnect message will display on the radio screen 182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Phone Button UConnect Hands Free Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Hands Free Phone UConnect feature if equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With UConnect message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button and the time of day will display In AM or FM mode pressing the TIME button will switch between the time and frequency displays
101. up on the shoulder portion of the lap shoulder belt will tighten the belt The cinching latch plate will keep the belt tight however any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary e Buckle the child into the restraint exactly as the manufacturer s instructions tell you e When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or collision it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren if equipped Each vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor age system called LATCH which stands for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren The LATCH system provides for the installation of the child restraint without using the vehicle s seat belts instead securing the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle structure LATCH compatible child restraint systems are now available However because the lower anchorages are to be intro duced over a period of years child restraint systems having attachments for those anchorages will continue to also have features for installation using the vehicle s seat belts Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR
102. window bag is located should remain free from any obstructions Continued 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME WARNING Continued e If your vehicle is equipped with window bags do not have any accessory items installed that will alter the roof including adding a sunroof to your vehicle Do not add roof racks that require perma nent attachments bolts or screws for installation on the vehicle roof Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason NOTE Do not use a clothing bar mounted to the coat hooks in this vehicle A clothing bar will impede the proper performance of the window bags Along with the seat belts front airbags work with the instrument panel knee bolsters to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger Window bags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types of collisions The front airbags deploy in moderate to severe frontal collisions If your vehicle is so equipped the window bag on the crash side of the vehicle is triggered in moderate to severe side collisions But even in collisions where the airbags work you need the seat belts to keep you in the right position for the airbags to protect you properly Here are some simple steps you can follow to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying airbag 1 Children 12 years and younger should always ride buckled up in a rear seat
103. with your cellular phone using simple voice commands e g Call Mike Work or Dial 248 555 1212 Your cellular phone s audio is trans mitted through your vehicle s audio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the UConnect system NOTE The UConnect system requires a cellular phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Profile Ver sion 0 96 or higher See the UConnect website for supported phones NOTE For UConnect customer support visit the following websites e www chrysler com uconnect e www dodge com uconnect e www jeep com uconnect es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83 e or call 1 877 855 8400 UConnect allows you to transfer calls between the system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system s microphone for private conversation The UConnect system is driven through your Bluetooth Hands Free profile cellular phone UConnect features Bluetooth technology the global standard that enables different electronic devices to con nect to each other without wires or a docking station so UConnect works no matter where you stow your cellu lar phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle s UConnect system The UConnect system allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to the system Only one linked or paired
104. you are using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing 108 000 Miles 180 000 km or 114 000 Miles 190 000 km or 114 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 413 120 000 Miles 200 000 km or 120 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires d Replace the engine air cleaner filter 1 Replace the ignition cables 3 7L engine 9 Replace the spark plugs 3 7L engines Q Replace the top row of spark plugs 4 7L engines 1 Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary 1 Inspect the CV joints C1 Inspect the exhaust system 1 Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary 1 Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following trailer towing snow plowing heavy loading taxi police delivery service commercial service off road desert operation or more than 50 of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 1 Change the automatic transmission fluid
105. 000 km or 36 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter CL Rotate tires J If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary d Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary J Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if you are using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing 42 000 Miles 70 000 km or 42 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 406 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ee 48 000 Miles 80 000 km or 48 Months Maintenance Service 54 000 Miles 90 000 km or Schedule 54 Months Maintenance 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Service Schedule T Rotate tires J Change the engine oil and engine oil J If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the filter engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary T Rotate tires Inspect the brake linings replace if nec
106. 20 Multi Function Control Lever 127 New Vehicle Break In Period 70 Occupant Restraints 000 46 dadu acr as 36 Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel 297 Oil Change Indicator 0 00 172 Oil Change Indicator Reset 172 Oil Engine 2c 9 aea eR Beas 356 397 Capacity Lao sens 4 086 PR Gehe Peg 396 change Interval 52 sco sd aeree RSS ER 357 Dipstick oa ayou isos e Ek hd nes de es 356 Disposal isos sie doy ad otis EROR aes edo 358 Filtet oie ca s SOS wae eR Y IE 358 397 Filter Disposal 1 2 llle 358 Identification LOO sesapa iinis ee 357 Materials Added to crese petens gas ertse 358 Recommendation 000008 357 396 SyDthetle uus sse tas was GR e eos Ru ace 358 MISCOSIEY e crea keea ac deba s OR ERR aR ae 357 396 Onboard Diagnostic System 353 354 Opener Garage Door HomeLink 142 Operator Manual Owner s Manual 4 Outside Rearview Mirrors llle 80 Overdfive 233 9224 345 5 404 244 PRPAURE EAR des 171 248 Overdrive OFF Switch 000 248 Overhead Console ae 135 136 Overhead Travel Information Center 136 Overheating Engine 0000000 169 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 4421 Panic Alarm 438 INDEX MM Parking Brakes eene ete Ree etes 267 Parking On Hill 267 Passing Light iocis otis tee Rr RR oe os 128 Pets ins i
107. 24 Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral N 325 Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral N 327 Reformulated Gasoline seanca 298 Refrigerant vede heed ees emu e d 361 Release Hood llle 121 Reminder Seat Belt llle 44 Remote Keyless Entry RKE 21 Remote Sound System Radio Controls 226 Remote Starting System 0 0 0 0 e eee 27 Replacement Keys 2529s rineto peters 17 Replacement Parts 0 00 0 00000 355 Replacement Tires a tia Taimani 0000 287 Reporting Safety Defects 00 420 Resetting Oil Change Indicator 172 Restraints Child 0 0 0 0 cee 58 63 Restraints Occupant 0 0 0 ee eee eee 36 Rocking Vehicle When Stuck 4 346 Rotation Lives sesi menep xa EGRE UE oed en 291 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 72 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 73 Safety Defects Reporting 420 Safety Information Tire 0 272 Safety Tips sect rsa ae gail a Ketat alee ae 71 Satellite Radio atte hiere re auts 221 Satellite Radio Antenna llle 222 Schedule Maintenance lesen 400 Seat Belt Maintenance 0 000 381 Seat Belt Reminder less 44 Seat Belts iu ea ead RR Cr REX EG 36 37 72 And Pregnant Women 4 45 Child Restramt 2er t 58 59 Extender i 4l244 e pe EO
108. 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will alert the driver to buckle their seat belt The driver should also instruct all other occu pants to buckle their seat belts If the driver unbuckles the seat belt while the vehicle is in motion an immediate chime will be heard and BeltAlert will continue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Warning Light for 96 sec onds or until the driver s seat belt is buckled BeltAlert will be reactivated if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h BeltAlert can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by following these steps ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 NOTE The following steps must occur within the first 60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON or START position Chrylser LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert 1 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and buckle the driver s seat belt 2 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and wait for the Seat Belt Warning Light to turn off 3 Within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle unbuckle and then re buckle the driver s seat belt at least three times within 10 seconds ending with the seat belt buckled 4 Turn off the engine A single chime will sound to signify that you have successfully completed the
109. 84 Compass lt gt c ciituutee lt i s fib vine es 140 Compass Calibration 00005 140 Compass Variance llle ese 141 Computer Trip Travel llle 136 Console Floor lees 154 Console Overhead lees 135 Contract Service Coolant Pressure Cap Radiator Cap 368 Cooling System 6 eee eee 366 Adding Coolant Antifreeze 367 Coolant Capacity ss rs Yen SA es 396 Coolant Level llle 366 369 Disposal of Used Coolant 0 369 Drain Flush and Refill Ln 366 Inspectiony ies ree E RET eses 369 Points to Remember 2 05 370 Pressure Cap s cra esee eee tede kesti 368 Radiator Cap seat rb E dinas 368 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 367 396 397 Temperature Gauge 0 eee eee 168 Crates Rear Convenience Storage sss 151 Cruise Control Speed Control 132 Cuplhioldefs 5 canes dint tac abo EEE E a 150 Customer Assistance 00 000 ee eee 423 en INDEX 431 Data Recorder Event 0 0 00 0 eens 56 Daytime Running Lights 126 Dealer Service 2 0 0 es 356 Defroster Rear Window 156 Defroster Windshield 05 72 230 Delay Intermittent Wipers 130 Diagnostic System Onboard 353 Differential Limited Slip 262 Dimmer Switch Headlight
110. A EET 12 Knee Bolster 4 is ocius ov es 46 Lane Change and Turn Signals 127 168 389 Lap Shoulder Belts llle 37 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren 542542 RR Y X EXEER RES 61 Lite of Tires i os a i cae wea em ES ERE S 286 Lights i2 Ree ee Rx RE 73 123 Apap uude eme koe eee eos ae RE 55 178 Anti Lock Warning 0000005 170 Back Up sentes aba Samad ta kee tees 389 Brake Wart ng i226 e ee 174 Bulb Replacement 0050 387 CARGO 4 Guia E Aw naa E Re eredi aU eu dien 126 Center Mounted Stop lille 391 Courtesy Reading 42 2 22i 44a tunes 136 Cruise pissasta koX eh BS Bact AN RES 178 Daytime Running 0 0 0 0 000 126 ln Ap c T 126 173 395 Hazard Warning Flasher 332 HeadlightS 1 sk xe 125 High Beam vie asus e EEUU 128 High Beam Low Beam Select 128 Instrument Cluster lees 168 Intensity Control 2 2 0 0 eee eee 123 IhterloE 2 x pg eR eee ES ae Aa 123 136 License HET 394 HO 496 INDEX ae Lights On Reminder sss 126 Low Fuel cnc eke 9 PER SE RESCF PAG 168 Malfunction Indicator Check Engine 175 Passing geeks ad dne hae cave ORE whee 128 Seat Belt Reminder 205 169 eig EM C 387 Tire Pressure Monitoring TPMS 176 Tum Signal 5 6 xe rl eR 127 387 389 Voltage covet Reg twa hae hea wens 170 Warning Instrument Cluster Descrip
111. ANEL M Program Type 16 Digit Character Program Type 16 Digit Character Display Display News News Weather Weather Nostalgia Nostalga By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon Oldies Oldies is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency Personality Persnlty station with the same selected Music Type name The Public Public Music Type function only operates when in the FM Rhythm and Blues R amp B mode Religious Music Rel Musc If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Religious Talk Rel Talk Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be Rock Rock exited and the radio will tune to the preset station SUR SETUP Button Soft Rock Soft Rck Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R amp B the following items sporis spore Set Clock Pressing the SELECT button will allow Talk Talk you to set the clock Turn the Tune Scroll control knob Top 40 Top 40 to adjust the hours and then press and turn the ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213 Tune Scroll control knob to adjust the minutes Press the Tune Scroll control knob again to save changes AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the
112. ATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Commands The Voice Recognition System understands two types of commands Universal commands are available at all times Local commands are available if the supported radio mode is active Changing the Volume 1 Start a dialogue by pressing the VR hard key 2 Say a command e g HELP 3 Use the ON OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the volume to a comfortable level while the voice recognition system is speaking Please note the volume setting for VR is different then the audio system Main Menu Start a dialogue by pressing the VR hard key You may say MAIN MENU to switch to the main menu In this mode you can say the following commands e RADIO to switch to the radio mode e DISC to switch to the disc mode e MEMO to switch to the memo recorder e SYSTEM SETUP to switch to system setup Radio AM or Radio Long Wave or Radio Medium Wave if equipped To switch to the AM band say AM or RADIO AM In this mode you may say the following commands e FREQUENCY to change the frequency e NEXT STATION to select the next station e PREVIOUS STATION to select the previous station e RADIO MENU to switch to the radio menu e MAIN MENU to switch to the main menu es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 Radio FM To switch to the FM band say FM or RADIO FM In this mode you may say the following commands e FREQUENCY to change the frequency e NEXT STATION to select the next
113. CK button on the RKE transmitter Then prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle insert the key into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the ON position otherwise the engine will cancel remote start and auto matically turn off Remote start will also cancel if any of the following occur e If the engine stalls or the RPM exceeds 2500 e Any engine warning light come on The hood is opened The Hazard switch is pressed The transmission is moved out of PARK en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 The vehicle can be started remotely up to a maximum of two times The vehicle is also allowed a maximum of one failed start where the remote start sequence was initiated but the engine stopped cranking without starting After either of these conditions or if the Vehicle Security Alarm System is activated or if the PANIC button was pressed the vehicle must be reset by inserting a valid key into the ignition and moving it to the RUN position then back to LOCK DOOR LOCKS Manual Door Locks All the doors can be manually locked from the inside by pushing down the door lock plunger located on the door trim panel Both front doors may be opened from the inside with the door lock plunger in the down or locked position WARNING e For personal security and safety in the event of an accident lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle Never leave children alone in a vehicle Lea
114. DVD the other side is a CD should not be used and they can cause damage to the player EJECT Button Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE Ejecting with ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display 204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M RW FF Press the RW button to stop the CD at the beginning of the current CD track title Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing t
115. E 129 Windshield Wipers The wipers and washers are operated by a switch in the multifunction lever Turn the end of the multifunction lever to select the desired wiper speed 8196c9d1 High Beam Low Beam WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column Wiper Washer Operation 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to an accident You might not see other Intermittent Wiper System The intermittent feature of this system was designed for use when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between cycles desirable For maximum delay between cycles rotate the control knob into the upper end of the delay range The delay interval decreases as you rotate the knob until it enters the LO continual speed position The delay can be regulated from a maximum of about 18 seconds between cycles to a cycle every two seconds The delay intervals will double in duration when the vehicle speed is 10 mph 16 km or less vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather warm the windshield with the defroster before and during windshield washer use NOTE Ifthe front wiper is operating when the ignition is turned off the wiper will automatically return to the Park position When the vehicle is restarted the wipers will r
116. E FUEL 4 7L ENGINE ONLY IF EQUIPPED E 85 General Information The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel ve hicles only These vehicles can be identified by the unique yellow fuel filler cap gas cap that shows E85 Gasoline This section only covers those subjects that are unique to these vehicles Please refer to the other sections of this ee STARTING AND OPERATING 303 manual for information on features that are common CAUTION between Flexible Fuel and gasoline only powered ve hicles Only vehicles with the E 85 fuel filler cap gas cap can operate on E 85 81ae46a9 81ae46ab E 85 Fuel Cap E 85 Badge 304 STARTING AND OPERATING M ETHANOL FUEL E 85 E 85 is a mixture of approximately 85 fuel ethanol and 15 unleaded gasoline WARNING Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could cause serious personal injury Never have any smok ing materials lit in or near the vehicle when remov ing the fuel filler tube cap gas cap or filling the tank Do not use E 85 as a cleaning agent and never use it near an open flame Fuel Requirements If your vehicle is E 85 compatible it will operate on unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 or E 85 fuel or any mixture of these two fuels For best results a refueling pattern that avoids alternat ing between E 85 and unleaded gasoline is recom mended When you do switch fuel types it is recommended that e you do not add less
117. ECT button if equipped e DVD Play Options Selecting the DVD Play Options will display the following e Subtitle Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch subtitles to different subtitle languages that are available on the disc if equipped 186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se e Audio Stream Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch to different audio languages if supported on the disc if equipped e Angle Repeatedly pressing SELECT will change the viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc if equipped NOTE e The available selections for each of the above entries varies depending upon the disc e These selections can only be made while playing a DVD e VES Power Allows you to turn VES ON and OFF if equipped e VES Lock Locks out rear VES remote controls if equipped e VES CHI CH2 Allows the user to change the mode of either the IR1 or IR2 wireless headphones by pressing the AUDIO SELECT button if equipped e Set Home Clock Pressing the SELECT button allows you to set the clock Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob again to save changes Player Defaults Selecting this item will allow the user to scroll through the following items and set defaults according to customer preference Menu Language If Equipped Selecting this item will a
118. Edit or Delete operations at this point e The UConnect system will then prompt you as to the number designation you wish to call e The selected number will be dialed Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the UConnect system if the feature s are available on your cellular service plan For example if your cellular service plan provides three way calling this feature can be accessed through the UConnect system Check with your cellular service provider for the features that you have Answer or Reject an Incoming Call No Call Currently in Progress When you receive a call on your cellular phone the UConnect system will interrupt the vehicle audio sys tem if on and will ask if you would like to answer the call Press the PHONE button to accept the call To reject the call press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming call was rejected Answer or Reject an Incoming Call Call Currently in Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your cell phone Press the PHONE button to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call NOTE The UConnect system compatible phones in the market today do not support rejecting an incoming ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93 call when another call is in progr
119. Ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol it does not have the negative effects of Methanol E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles Non FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain ing 10 ethanol E10 Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the vehicle s warranty If a Non FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E 85 fuel the engine will have some or all of these symptoms e operate in a lean mode e OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on e poor engine performance e poor cold start and cold drivability e increased risk for fuel system component corrosion To fix a Non FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with E 85 perform the following e drain the fuel tank see your authorized dealer e change the engine oil and oil filter e disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the engine controller memory More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged exposure to E 85 fuel 300 STARTING AND OPERATING Se MMT In Gasoline MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emission system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle The MMT cont
120. Files 216 List Button CD Mode For MP3 Play 218 Info Button CD Mode For MP3 Play 219 ll Sound Box Operation isses 220 H Satellite Radio If Equipped REN REQ RER RES REU Radios Only 221 System Activation ues od ey reg a pity 221 Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 221 Selecting Satellite Mode 222 Satellite Antenna 00 222 Reception Quality 0 0 223 ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 165 Operating Instructions Satellite Mode 223 CD Players cuit eae Eee Gade em cas 227 Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone E CD DVD Maintenance 227 MCPUMLESUNasaeh rd nant vie giat ae ll Radio Operation And Cellular Phones 228 Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES B Climate Controls 46 4645 uem RR vey eos 228 f Equipped sek eed ans papi 226 Air Conditioning And Heater ll Remote Sound System Controls Operating Tips sss aee uS ee axes If Equipped i csse cede teme 226 Operation Tips Chart Radio Operation sss iranse cira nasteri 227 166 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 1 Headlight Switch 2 Air Outlets 3 Demister Outlets 4 Instrument Cluster 5 Airbags
121. Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and leave you stranded Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you 266 STARTING AND OPERATING Se POWER STEERING The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost If for some reason the power assist is interrupted it will still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these condi tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers NOTE Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering system This noise should be considered normal and it does not in any way damage the steering system WARNING Continued operation with reduced power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others Service should be obtained as soon as possible CAUTION Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the st
122. Handles 2 a d Has To open the storage crate lift upwards on the crate 3 Release Lever handles and engage the crate end flaps To remove the crate press on the release lever and lift up on the crate ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 Plastic Grocery Bag Retainers Retainer hooks which will hold plastic grocery bag handles are built into the back panel of the cab Insert Crate To install the crate into the base insert the crate into the inboard slot and push down on the outboard side of the crate and snap into place Grocery Bag Retainers To collapse the crate push the crate end flaps inward to disengage Push the sides inward and snap into the base 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE x FLOOR CONSOLE IF EQUIPPED Floor Console Features The Floor Console between the driver s and front pas senger s seat has the following features e Miscellaneous storage compartments e Three cupholders two removable e iPod Phone storage bin e 12 Volt power outlet inside storage compartment e Side open armrest lid Tissue holder and two pen holders Coin slots located under the instrument panel center stack Storage Compartments Some miscellaneous storage compartments and cuphold ers are both removable and dishwasher safe upper rack of dishwasher only for cleaning purposes Various stor age compartments provide versatile and useful storage A coin holder
123. If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD II system is ready or not ready if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non MOPAR parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty 356 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person nel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure yourself NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only that service work for which you have
124. Illuminated 20 Event Data Recorder sls 56 Exhaust Gas Caution 0 71 302 364 Exhaust System o 04 0024 sega eee eon ras 71 363 Extender Seat Belt 0 0 00 00 cee 45 Exterior Lighting is Re RR REC 125 Fabric Care imc ARRAY V Ra d 379 Filters Air Cleaner iia kzagua xri arp xa 359 Engine Oil i5elIt m RR RR RES 358 397 Engine Oil Disposal issse 358 Flashers Hazard Warning 39 sen aue re e pes 332 Torti Signal x mace cene 127 168 389 Flat Tire Stowage ces aes e Desi 343 Flexible Fuel Vehicles Cruising Range ER eU DUANE 305 Engine Qil oo nudus paai e Gis beta is e ren 305 Fuel Requirements llle 302 304 Replacement Parts 00000 305 Staring a ies cee sue ede a RE Ee 305 Flooded Engine Starting 0 240 Floor Console 0 0 0 0 cee eee 154 Fluid Brake soser neers caw poe REC ERG 398 Fluid Capacities 2 eee ee 396 en INDEX 433 Fluid Level Checks Automatic Transmission sss 372 Brake esgar nd 4 ea eR ER we TES Si en 371 Engine Oil i eie Gi ed Gad 356 Power Steering cos oe see wR iaaa 266 Transfer Case 44 24e o ea oe eo BA eux aea 375 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 397 Fog Lights ssrds om RR IR 126 395 Four Wheel Drive 00 00 cee eee 251 Operation cu aug cepa tan adware dee owe n 251 Four Way Hazard Flasher 332 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle
125. N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 404 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ME 18 000 Miles 30 000 km or 24 000 Miles 40 000 km or 24 Months Maintenance Service 18 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule T Change the engine oil and engine oil filter T Change the engine oil and engine oil Q Rotate tires filter 1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the T Rotate tires engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the front and rear axle fluid d Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary change if you are using your vehicle for Q Inspect the CV joints police taxi fleet off road or frequent 21 Inspect the exhaust system trailer towing d Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 405 30 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires d Replace the engine air cleaner filter 1 Replace the spark plugs 3 7L engines d Replace the top row of spark plugs 4 7L engines 1 Inspect the transfer case fluid 30 000 Miles 50 000 km or 36 000 Miles 60
126. NING YOUR VEHICLE 391 5 Reverse this procedure to install bulb and housing Center High Mounted Stop Light And Cargo Place the two raised blocks past the body Lamp 1 Remove the two screws holding the housing lens to the body as shown 392 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 2 Remove housing from the cab 3 Remove connector from housing tab for more clearance 81489fce MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 393 4 Turn desired bulb socket 1 4 turn and remove socket 5 Pull desired bulb straight from the socket and bulb from housing J 81489fbc 81489fb8 e Outside Bulbs Cargo Lamps e Inside Bulb Center High Mounted Stop Light 6 Reverse this procedure for installation of bulbs and housing 394 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE License Lamps 2 Rotate the socket 1 4 turn counterclockwise 1 Using a screwdriver pry black rubber housing from the bumper 3 Pull bulb from socket 4 Reverse this procedure for installation MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 395 Fog Lights 1 Disconnect connector from fog light by raising the wire harness lock tab and pulling on wire harness connector 2 Rotate fog light bulb 1 4 turn counterclockwise and pull to remove from fog light housing 3 Reverse procedure to install 396 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES U S Metric Fuel Approximate 22 Gallons 83 Liters Engine Oil with Filter 3 7L Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certified 5 Quarts 4
127. ORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 the same key chain will not cause a key related transponder fault unless the additional part is physi cally held against the ignition key being used when starting the vehicle Cell phones pagers or other RF electronics will not cause interference with this system All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics Replacement Keys NOTE Only keys that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle Once a Sentry Key is programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle CAUTION Always remove the Sentry Keys from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit Personal Identification Number PIN Keep the PIN in a secure location This number is required for authorized dealer replacement of keys Du plication of keys may be performed at an authorized dealer or by following the customer key programming procedure This procedure consists of programming a blank key to the vehicle electronics A blank key is one that has never been programmed NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer Customer Key Programming If you have two valid Sentry Keys you can program new Sentry Keys to the system by performing the followin
128. RTING YOUR VEHICLE Se windows down or partially open This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems These include the front and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers knee bolsters front airbags for both the driver and front passenger and if equipped left and right side curtain airbags for the driver and passengers seated next to a window If you will be carrying children too small for adult size seat belts your seat belts or the LATCH feature refer to the Child Restraint in this section can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible WARNING In a collision you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause a collision that includes you This can happen far away from
129. Rae 369 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 269 270 Anti Lock Warning Light lus 170 Anti Theft Security Alarm Theft Alarm 19 Anti Theft System isle ert tirats 19 170 App arance Cate 6 a ka gee ak ae eee eae 376 Assistance lowing sski Pie cies eseis 96 Auto Unlock Doors 0 0000 eee es 31 Automatic Door Locks 000000000 ee 30 Automatic Transaxle 0000000 12 245 Interlock System 4 s cipere Oe Ped Res 15 Automatic Transmission 239 246 372 Adding Fluid 4 eere seos eR Bs 373 Fluid Level Check 0 000000 372 Fluid Type cuc e mee REESE 398 Gear Ranges sso ede ber 32 She EX DPA PS 246 Special Additives ics ke etes 374 Torque Converter 0000000000 250 Axle Fud sereas i a e ah RE S US 398 Axle Lubrication Axle Fluid 375 en INDEX 429 Batt ry M T CETT 359 Charging favs bee bea Rear bras 343 Emergency Starting 00000 343 Gas Caution i 4 2 8904 6 3 48 AR PURSE OS 343 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 26 Saving Feature Protection 124 Belts Seat kae Fue d e E ACE be 37 Body Mechanism Lubrication 362 Box Sound iius e he oe ERR EX 220 B Pillaf Location messene pametis cR R9 ve 276 Brake Fluid usc dugina bac ane ane a8 398 Brake System ss 22 esa dob ach dE goe ess 269 371 Anti Lock ABS 0 0000 269 270 Fluid Check oui E IA 371 Mast
130. Rotate the Recline Lever knob to increase or decrease the amount of lumbar support 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE To lower the head restraint depress the release button located at the base of the head restraint and push down on the head restraint 81581858 Lumbar Adjustment Adjustable Head Restraints Front Seating Positions Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in Adjustable Head Restraints the event of impact from the rear Pull up or push down on the restraints so that the upper edge is as high as practical at least to the level of the ears es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 Six Way Power Seat Adjuster Driver s Side Only The power seat controls are located on the outboard side of the driver s seat cushion Three switches control the seat movement The four way switch in the center can be moved forward backward up or down to adjust for the most comfortable position Up Down Forward and Rearward 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The seat angle can also be adjusted by using the two toggle switches tilting it up or down Tilt Adjustment Extended Cab Crew Cab Rear Seat More cargo space is available by lifting up on the rear seat cushion The Crew Cab Rear Seat is a 60 40 split cushion and full back Either cushion can be raised independently Heated Seats If Equipped The Heated Seat switches are located on
131. S 45 Front Seat i5 9c ex ORE c Rea ex 37 Pre tenslOtiets eso aus a Eme 3 Rex xo mer es 44 Reminder 5 x s aes aee ick P ROBO EROR TA 169 INN 440 INDEX aaa SEALS ue eere VIR ense ia ea OL NOR RUN 115 Adjustment is uude 9 ees PE Hd be Hex as 115 Cleaning 2heiess be BAS ROC RR 379 Heated i222 eR RR 120 Lumbar Support 0 0 00 000 000 Es 117 Reclining aes dtp rn EAA awe hes 116 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 19 170 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 367 397 Selechon of Oll 2s sk oS OkGGae ba ea 357 Sentry Key Immobilizer 0 16 Sentry Key Programming lesen 17 Sentry Key Replacement ee cires ot siiret 17 Service and Maintenance 5 356 Service Assistance eee 419 423 Service Contract err erei erkk eri ia 425 Service Manuals lesen 421 Setting the Clock 179 182 196 199 209 Shift Speeds Lesescersus ce ue Wu tees Rial ds 243 Shifting Automatic Transmission LL 246 Manual Transmission 0 0005 242 Transfer Case s 0 ee 251 Transfer Case Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral N c Re y RE 325 Transfer Case Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral N 2 2 RR RR 327 Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage 42 Shoulder Belts lille 37 Signals TUM ks dopa pae dnos 127 168 389 Snow Chains Tire Chains 289 Snow PIO
132. S OF YOUR VEHICLE M the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num WARNING ber This feature is supported in the U S Canada and Mexico Your phone must be turned on and paired to the NOTE UConnect system to allow use of this vehicle feature in emergency situations when the cell phone has network coverage and stays paired to the UConnect system e The emergency number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 911 for the U S and Canada and 060 for Mexico The number dialed may not be applicable with the available cellular service and area Towing Assistance If you need towing assistance e Press the PHONE button to begin If supported this number may be programmable on some systems To do this press Phone button and say Setup followed by Emergency e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say e The UConnect system does slightly lower your Towing nocptanbe chances of successfully making a phone call as to that for the cell phone directly ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 NOTE e The Towing Assistance number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 1 800 528 2069 for the U S 1 877 213 4525 for Canada 55 14 3454 for Mexico City and 1 800 712 3040 for outside Mexico City in Mexico If supported this number may be programmable on some systems To do this press Phone button and say Setup follow
133. Setting Procedure 179 lll Sales Code REQ AM FM Stereo Radio And 6 Disc CD DVD Changer MP3 WMA AUX JACK 3 5 ontario e dr 180 Operating Instructions Radio Mode 180 Operation Instructions Disc Mode For CD And MP3 WMA Audio Play DVD Video Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files List Button Disc Mode For MP3 WMA Play Info Button Disc Mode For MP3 WMA Play ll AM FM CD DVD Multimedia System Radio RER REN If Equipped Operating Instructions Voice Recognition System VR If Equipped 164 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Operating Instructions Hands Free Communication UConnect It Equipped c sensa ere ok DRER Coens ws Clock Setting Procedure lll Sales Code RES AM FM Stereo Radio With CD Player MP3 AUX Jack sirs steeds ants Operating Instructions Radio Mode Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play Notes On Playing MP3 Files Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode ll Sales Code RES RSC AM FM Stereo Radio With CD Player MP3 AUX Jack And Sirius Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play 0 0 214 Notes On Playing MP3
134. TIN 275 Tire Markings 24 muere esee mes 272 Tire Safety Information 04 272 THOS RC 73 280 422 Aging Life of Tires 0000 286 Air Pressure euim RAUS ENSE eae 4 280 Alignment iio wage hae eden ds pd aed 288 Chains 42g heeee cag alee ead e oles e had 289 Changing cica ccs e sve sevens e o ey 332 Compact Spare vec erp RR ERE Es 284 General Information 442 INDEX M High Speed se sarria cae ae m eedem a 282 Inflation Pressures 0 0 0 eee eee 281 Jacking sasescbdm ee eri be tS gos ROS sah ox 337 Leor Des ue 5X Bos OE PURIS Ee 286 Load Capacity sess 276 277 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 292 Pressure Warning Light 176 Quality Grading iss siehe Rb S 422 Radial iue epar ERE eS 283 Replacement ase he RE edo d ira eaen 287 ROHOM x3 sos see derer boa des e Regie Rese Geared 291 Safety CP 272 280 OIZ S sacar paana Sade RSS CARGO XUNG ACA 273 SNOW Tires i402 00a die ae awe E wERE A A 291 Spare De s cena ed eva xa pesa enpi es 334 SPINNING lits hf e em ehe Eee de d bs 285 Tread Wear Indicators 0000 286 Wheel Mounting ss rset etsia sa 0000000 337 Wheel Nut Torque 0000000 341 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight 316 Torque Converter Clutch 004 250 Tow Hooks Emergency 0000000 346 TOWING Lvesuesduaev ead erue a ed rey de 310 24 Hour Towing Assistance
135. TING AND OPERATING 319 4 Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized When replacing tires refer to Replacement Tires This requirement may limit the ability to always under Tires General Information in Section 5 Re achieve the 10 to 15 range of tongue weight as a placing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will percentage of total trailer weight not increase the vehicle s GVWR and GAWR limits Towing Requirements Tires Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or spare tire vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer This could cause inadequate braking and possible Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe o personal injury and satisfactory operation of your vehicle For proper tire inflation procedures refer to Tire Pressures An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is under Tires General Information in Section 5 required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system an electronic brake controller is not required Also check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer For the proper inspection procedure refer to Iread Wear I
136. The UConnect system will play the current confirmation prompt status and you will be given the choice to change it ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 Phone and Network Status Indicators If available on the radio and or on a premium display such as the instrument panel cluster and supported by your cell phone the UConnect system will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using UConnect The status is given for roaming net work signal strength phone battery strength etc Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone keypad and still use the UConnect system while dial ing via the cell phone keypad the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth cellular phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s audio system The UConnect system will work the same as if you dial the number using voice recognition NOTE Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the dial ring to the UConnect system to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situation after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio Mute Un Mute Mute Off When you mute the UConnect sys
137. The changes are transferred and updated to UConnect on the next phone connection Phonebook Download Single Entry If equipped and supported by your phone UConnect allows the user to download entries from their phone via Bluetooth To use this feature press the PHONE button and say Phonebook Download The system prompts Ready to accept V card entry via Bluetooth The system is now ready to accept phonebook entries from your phone using the Bluetooth Object Exchange Profile OBEX Please see your phone Owner s Manual for specific instructions on how to send these entries from your phone NOTE e The phone handset must support Bluetooth OBEX transfers of phonebook entries to use this feature e Some phones cannot send phonebook entries if they are already connected to any system via Bluetooth and you may see a message on the phone display that the Bluetooth link is busy In this case the user must first disconnect or drop the Bluetooth connection to the UConnect system and then send the address book entry via Bluetooth Please see your phone Owner s Manual for specific instructions on how to drop the Bluetooth connection If the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters it will only use the first 24 characters Edit UConnect Phonebook Entries NOTE e Editing names in the phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot
138. VEHICLE Se connection to the top tether anchorages have been avail able for some time For some older child restraints many child restraint manufacturers offer add on tether strap kits or retro fit kits You are urged to take advantage of all the available attachments provided with your child re straint in any vehicle Extended Cab e The Extended Cab front and right rear if equipped with a rear seat passenger seating positions have lower anchorages for LATCH equipped child restraints Crew Cab e The Crew Cab second row seat has lower anchorages that are capable of accommodating LATCH compatible child seats having flexible webbing mounted lower attachments at all three seating posi tions Child seats with fixed lower attachments must be installed in the outboard positions only Regardless of the specific type of lower attachment NEVER install LATCH compatible child seats such that two seats share a common lower anchorage If you are installing LATCH compatible child restraints in adjacent rear seating positions you can use the LATCH anchors or the vehicle s seat belt for the outboard position but you must use the vehicle s seat belt at the center position ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 If your child restraints are not LATCH compatible you can only install the child restraints using the vehicle s seat belts Refer to Installing the LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System in this section
139. VEHICLE M WARNING Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide a danger ous gas Do not run your vehicle in the garage while training the transceiver Exhaust gas can cause seri ous injury or death Programming HomeLink Before You Begin The Compass Mini Trip Computer CMTC illuminates the HomeLink symbol a house with an arrow inside it along with 1 2 or 3 indicators under it when a HomeLink button is pressed Pay attention to the indicator s as they will flash at different rates or remain solid during training If you have not trained any of the HomeLink buttons erase all channels before you begin training To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds Release the buttons when the indicators start to flash It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand held transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink for more efficient training and accurate transmission of the radio frequency signal Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage while training 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 inches 3 to 8 cm from the HomeLink buttons while keeping the HomeLink display in view For optimal training point the battery end of the hand held transmitter away from the HomeLink ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen HomeLink button
140. Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle including driver passengers vehicle options and cargo The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and rear axle systems Total load must be limited so that GVWR is not exceeded Payload The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load weight a vehicle can carry including the weight of the driver all passengers options and cargo ee STARTING AND OPERATING 309 Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front and rear axles The load must be distributed in the cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded Each axle GAWR is determined by the component in the system with the lowest load carrying capacity axle springs tires or wheels Heavier axles or suspension components sometimes specified by purchasers for increased durability do not necessarily increase the vehicle s GVWR Tire Size This is the minimum allowable tire size for your vehicle Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size Rim Size This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size listed Inflation Pressure Cold This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR Curb Weight The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight of the vehicle with all fluids including vehicle fuel at full capacity con
141. W aces c6 ii bee ea EG 323 Snow Les uris coe ne a Laveen xev WAT as 291 Sound BOX serpiente e oed eT gera ee 220 Spare Tite Lia vutpdce sie sus s doled e Gd d 284 334 Speed Control Cruise Control 132 Speedometer aep EE cep R ES d Ps 170 Starting iecore er ERR ee 239 nn INDEX 441 Emergency Jump Starting 343 Engine Block Heater llli ss 241 Engine Fails to Start 00000 240 Remole fase cd OSG 9 a RR ES Puer s 27 Steering Column Controls llle 127 POWE is Rx e taea ah EE dS APR 266 Wheel Lock 2 22 n mm 15 Wheel Tilt a ach accio ete at doe RR ak ad 131 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls ius eres d Re cien te edo in ard 226 Storage Behind the Seat 0 151 Storage BIN a statins ned eg dob RUP ges ea a alts 151 Storage Vehicle cas dae ciwe c db ERROR Read 386 Stuck Fr eing is scissa er ea 346 Supplemental Tire Pressure Information 289 Synthetic Engine Oil eese 358 System Remote Starting llis 27 Tachometer paa cin ae een e SU Ro Ak 171 Tailgate a ccs us ciate Sans ava chats avons cans 158 Taillights 56s ener eee RES 389 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 168 Tether Anchor Child Restraint 61 Tilt Steering Column a2 cx cane ea as 131 Tip Start dx eise hr depu RR RR OR be ee hres 239 Tire and Loading Information Placard 276 289 Tire Identification Number
142. a EROR neon 150 H Rear Storage If Equipped 151 Rear Convenience Storage Crates Plastic Grocery Bag Retainers ll Floor Console If Equipped Floor Console Features sss ll Rear Cargo Area Utility Rails Bl Rear Window Features Rear Window Defroster If Equipped Sliding Rear Window If Equipped li Slide In Campers Camper Applications General Information 0 Carbon Monoxide Warning Vehicles Equipped With A Cap Or Slide In Campers 158 es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 79 lalate coe aden eR RE codecs 158 Two Position Tailgate Upper Load Platform dues ae REESE 159 Tailgate Removal eessen daea g aain pnn 158 80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE xe MIRRORS Inside Day Night Mirror A two point pivot system allows for horizontal and vertical adjustment of the mirror The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position toward the rear of the vehicle The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position toward the windshield 130501750 Outside Mirrors To receive maximum benefit adjust the outside mirror s to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overla
143. a complete stop NEUTRAL Shift to NEUTRAL when vehicle is standing for pro longed periods with engine running Engine may be started in this range Set the parking brake if you must leave the vehicle DRIVE Use DRIVE for most city and highway driving 2 Second For driving slowly in heavy city traffic or on mountain roads where more precise speed control is desirable use 2nd gear Use it also when climbing long grades and for engine braking when descending moderately steep grades To prevent excessive engine speed do not exceed 45 mph 72 km h in this range 248 STARTING AND OPERATING M 1 First For driving up very steep hills and for engine braking at low speeds 25 mph 40 km h or less when going down hill use 1st gear To prevent excessive engine speed do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h in this range Overdrive Operation The Overdrive automatic transmission contains an electronically controlled 4th and 5th if equipped gear Overdrive The transmission will automatically shift from Drive to Overdrive if the following conditions are present e the transmission shift lever is in Drive e the engine coolant has reached normal operating tem perature e vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph 48 km h e the TOW HAUL switch has not been activated e transmission has reached normal temperature operating NOTE If the vehicle is started in extremely cold tem peratures the transmission may not sh
144. a for Cana dian residents Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID Please have the following information available when calling 222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 2 Your Vehicle Identification Number To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps ESN SID Access With REQ RES Radios With the ignition switch in the ON RUN or ACC posi tion and the radio on press the SETUP button and scroll using the Tune Scroll control knob until Sirius ID is selected Press the Tune Scroll control knob and the Sirius ID number will display The Sirius ID number display will time out in two minutes Press any button on the radio to exit this screen ESN SID Access With REN RER Radios While in SAT mode press the MENU button on the radio faceplate Next touch the SUBSCRIPTION tab on the touch screen All the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display ESN SID Access With REU Radio While in SAT mode press the MENU button on the radio faceplate Next turn the knob surrounding the joystick in the center of the radio to scroll to Subscription and then press and release the joystick All of the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display Selecting Satellite Mode Press the SAT button until SAT appears in the display A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum
145. a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel MUSIC TYPE Button REU Radio Pressing this button provides a MUSIC TYPES list from which you can make a selection Once a selection is made you can seek up or down or scan the channels and the radio will tune to the next station matching the selected format There is no time out for this screen ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225 Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button again will close the MUSIC TYPE screen Once closed seek up seek down and scan will no longer be based on your selection SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the following items e Display Sirius ID number Press the AUDIO SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number This number is used to activate deactivate or change the Sirius subscription SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this channel and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with
146. aa 6 wlernrlci VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada the name Chrysler LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler Canada Inc used in substitution therefor DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum If you are drinking don t drive Ride with a designated non drinking driver call a cab a friend or use public transportation WARNING Driving after drinking can lead to an accident Your perceptions are less sharp your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking Never drink and then drive This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or op tional on this vehicle This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle Chrysler LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications and or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previ ously manufactured Copyright 2008 Chrysler LLC e SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 INTRODUCTION isos ose m e nm 66 ware
147. ab back panel is designed to be used for the front seat center seating position The Crew Cab model has three anchorages located behind each of the rear seating positions rear left rear center and rear right ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 WARNING 2 Connect the tether strap to the lower anchor 3 Remove the slack in the tether strap so that it is pulled e With a child restraint installed in the rear passen tight ger side locations use care when adjusting the front seat s rearward to avoid the front seatback coming in contact with the belted child directly behind the seat The child could be injured Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint It could come loose in a collision The child could be seriously injured or killed Make sure the child restraint tether strap is always routed through the proper anchor strap inner loop Tether Strap at the Front Passenger Seat Extended Cab 1 Route the child restraint tether strap up and over the front passenger seatback and under the head restraint 81478343 Tether Strap 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Tether Straps at the Rear Passenger Seat Extended 2 Route the tether strap across to the center tether Cab anchorage The center tether is located behind the slide door in the center of the vehicle between the two seating 1 Route the child restraint tether strap through the routing loop lo
148. actor seat belts refer to Automatic Locking Mode in this section If you have trouble tightening the lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint follow these steps If the buckle is webbing mounted disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end belt to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out If the belt still can t be tightened the buckle is not webbing mounted or if by pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt you may need to do something more Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the latch plate around and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still can t make the child restraint secure try a different seating position or use the locking clip provided with your child restraint To complete the child seat installation refer to Child Restraint Tether Anchor in this section Child Restraint Tether Anchor a The Extended Cab model has one routing strap a b located behind the passenger side rear out board seating position The tether anchor itself is located in the center of vehicle in between the two seating positions The front outboard passenger seating position is also equipped with a child tether anchorage located at the base of the front seatback When there is a rear seat delete option the tether anchorage located on the c
149. alarm is arming The light will flash at a slower speed continu ously after the alarm is set The security light will also come on for about three seconds when the ignition is first turned ON 11 Anti Lock Brake System ABS This light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System fes ABS The light will illuminate when the igni If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving it tion switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171 is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock brakes If the ABS light does not illuminate when the Ignition switch is turned to the ON position have the light inspected by an authorized dealer 12 Oil Pressure Warning Light S27 The Oil Pressure Warning Light illuminates when the engine oil pressure has become too low For a bulb check this light will come on momentarily when the ignition is turned ON If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible Immediate service should be obtained 13 Tachometer The tachometer gauge measures engine revolutions per minute rpm x 1000 14 Shift
150. amps Red Green 44 10 Amp Rt Park Lamps 52 Spare Red 53 40 Amp Rear Defogger 45 20Amp Trailer Tow Park Green Yellow Lamps 54 Spare 46 ie SUP Airbag System 2 55 Spare e 386 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cavity ur ed aaa Description 56 10 Amp Heated Seats Red 57 20 Amp Airbag System 2 Yellow 58 20 Amp Heated Seats Yellow 59 10 Amp HVAC Module Red 60 10Amp ABS Module Red 61 20 Amp Front Control Module Yellow FCM 3 Reverse Lamps VEHICLE STORAGE If you are storing your vehicle for more than 21 days we recommend that you take the following steps to mini mize the drain on your vehicle s battery e Disconnect the Ignition Off Draw LO D fuses located in the Power Distribution Center PDC The LO D cavity includes a snap in retainer that allows the fuse to be disconnected without removing it from the fuse block e The transfer case should be placed in the 4HI mode and kept in this position to minimize the battery drain e As an alternative to the above steps you may discon nect the negative cable from the battery es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 387 REPLACEMENT LIGHT BULBS BULB REPLACEMENT Headlight Halogen Front Park And Turn Lights LIGHT BULBS Interior Bulb No Dome Light noaoo hed aed eu eae iees WL212 2 1 Open the hood Cargo Light i i ssssase aee me ees 921 2 Remove the three bolts from the front of the headlight Overhead Console Ligh
151. and professional crash researchers such as those associated with univer sities and with hospital and insurance organizations In the event that an investigation is undertaken by Chrylser LLC regardless of initiative the company or its designated representative will first obtain permission of the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle usually the vehicle owner or lessee before accessing the elec tronic data stored unless ordered to download data by a ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 court with legal jurisdiction i e pursuant to a warrant A copy of the data will be provided to the custodial entity upon request General data that does not identify par ticular vehicles or crashes may be released for incorpo ration in aggregate crash databases such as those main tained by the U S government and various states Data of a potentially sensitive nature such as would identify a particular driver vehicle or crash will be treated confi dentially Confidential data will not be disclosed by Chrylser LLC to any third party except when 1 Used for research purposes such as to match data with a particular crash record in an aggregate database provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter preserved 2 Used in defense of litigation involving a Chrylser LLC product 3 Requested by police under a legal warrant 4 Otherwise required by law Data Parameters that May Be Recorded e Diagnost
152. and the hand held transmitter button until the indicator s change from a slow to a rapid flash rate Then release both the HomeLink and hand held trans mitter buttons It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases The garage door may open amp close while you train If the signal is too weak to train replace the battery in the original hand held transmitter NOTE Some gate operators and garage door openers may require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted in the Gate Operator Canadian Programming section 4 Press and hold the just trained HomeLink button If the indicator s blink rapidly for two seconds and then remains constant continue with the next section Pro gramming A Rolling Code System NOTE After training a HomeLink channel if the garage door does not operate with HomeLink and the garage door opener was manufactured after 1995 the garage door opener may have rolling code If so proceed to the heading Programming A Rolling Code System 5 PROGRAMMING A ROLLING CODE SYSTEM At the garage door opener motor in the garage locate the learn or training button This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener motor it is NOT the button normally used to open amp close the door 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 81c4849d 1 Garage Door Opener 2 Training Button 6 Firmly press and r
153. ank e Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is running NOTE If fuel is poured from a portable container the container should have a flexible nozzle long enough to extend into the fuel filler tube To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling NOTE When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full NOTE Tighten the gas cap until you hear a clicking sound This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened Make sure that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is refueled WARNING A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle or on a truck bed You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling 308 STARTING AND OPERATING ME VEHICLE LOADING Certification Label As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin istration Regulations your vehicle has a certification label affixed to the driver s side door 8120c1d2 Certification Label This label contains the month and year of manufacture Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR front and rear and Vehicle Identification Number VIN A Month Day Hour MDH number is included on this label and shows the month day and hour of manufacture The bar code that appears on the bottom of the label is your Vehicle Identification Number VIN Gross
154. arily through the floor out lets located under the instrument panel Mix Pe Outside air flows in equal proportions through the floor and defroster outlets Defrost SV Outside air is primarily directed to the windshield through the defroster outlets located at the base of the windshield and the demister outlets located at the edge of each side of the instrument panel NOTE The air conditioner compressor operates in both Mix and Defrost or a blend of these modes even if the A C button has not been pressed This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield Blower Control N of MN 80201359 The rotary knob on the left of the control panel is the Blower Control Turn the knob clockwise to one of the four positions to obtain the blower speed you desire To turn the blower off turn the knob to the far left position NOTE For vehicles equipped with Remote Start the climate controls will not function during Remote Start operation if the blower control is left in the O Off position Temperature Control 80a0135a Circulation UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231 The rotary knob at the center of the control panel controls the temperature of the inte rior air You can choose your degree of comfort by rotating the knob The coldest tem perature setting is to the ex treme left blue region and the warmest setting is to the extreme right red region of the rotation The cab is d
155. ase must be shifted into NEUTRAL 2WD Models for recreational towing The NEUTRAL selection Recreational towing of 2WD models is not allowable button is located on the lower left hand corner of Towing the vehicle with the transmission in NEUTRAL the 4WD Control Switch Shifts into and out of can cause severe transmission damage Removal of the transfer case NEUTRAL can take place with the driveshaft for towing is not recommended since this selector switch in any mode position would allow fluid to drain from the transmission Automatic transmissions must be placed in PARK 4WD Models position for recreational towing CAUTION e Internal damage to the transfer case will occur if a Manual transmissions must be placed in gear for example 4th gear for recreational towing Failure to follow these procedures can cause severe trans mission and or transfer case damage front or rear wheel lift is used when recreational towing Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 325 Recreational Towing Procedure Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for recreational towing CAUTION It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL before recre ational towing to prevent damage to internal parts 1 Bring vehicle to a complete stop 2 Shut engine OFF 3 Turn the ignition key to the ON position but do not start the engine 4 Depress brake pedal 5 Shift aut
156. aster Cylinder The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked whenever the vehicle is serviced or immediately if the brake system warning light is on If necessary add fluid to bring level to the full mark on the side of the reservoir of the brake master cylinder Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap With disc brakes fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear Brake fluid level should be checked when pads are replaced If the brake fluid level is abnormally low check system for leaks Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type WARNING e Use of brake fluid that may have a lower initial boiling point or is unidentified as to specifica tions may result in sudden brake failure during hard prolonged braking You could have an acci dent Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire 372 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Sx Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture CAUTION Do not allow a petroleum base fluid to contaminate the brake fluid Seal damage may result Clutch Hydraulic System The clutch hydraulic system is a sealed maintenance free system In the event of leakage or other malfunction the system must be replaced Manual Transmission
157. ate at the same speed This is accomplished by rotating the 2WD Control Switch to these positions The 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions are intended for loose slippery road surfaces only Driving in the 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions on dry hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to the driveline components The transfer case NEUTRAL position is selected by depressing the recessed button located on the lower left hand corner of the 4WD Control Switch NOTE The transfer case NEUTRAL position is to be used for recreational towing only Refer to Recreational Towing in Section 5 for specific procedures on shifting into and out of NEUTRAL Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights Transfer case position indicator lights are located on the instrument cluster If there are no indicator lights on or flashing the transfer case position is 4 wheel drive AWD and indicates the current and desired transfer case selection AWD 4WD LOCK The SVC 4WD warning light monitors the electric shift 4WD system If this light remains on after engine start up or illuminates during driving it means that the 4WD system is not functioning properly and that service is required See your authorized dealer for service ee STARTING AND OPERATING 259 WARNING Always engage the parking brake when powering down the vehicle if the SVC 4WD light is illumi nated Not engaging the parking brake may allow the vehicle to roll
158. atic Transmission Fluid Clutch Linkage Multi Purpose Grease NLGI Grade 2 E P or equivalent Front Axle SAE 75W 90 Multi Purpose Type GL 5 Gear Lubricant MS 9763 Rear Axle SAE 75W 140 Synthetic Gear Lubricant MS 8985 Limited slip rear axles require MOPAR limited slip additive MS 10111 Whenever a fluid change is made 4 oz 118 ml should be added to the gear lubricant Brake Master Cylinder MOPAR DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used If DOT 3 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Use only recommended brake fluids Power Steering Reservoir MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS H Emissions Control System Maintenance 400 Required Maintenance Intervals Mi Maintenance Schedule 0 0 400 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 400 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES MEM EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in bold type must be done at the times or mileages specified to ensure the continued proper functioning of the Emissions Con trol System These and all other maintenance services included in this manual should be done to provide best vehicle performance and reliability More frequent main tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip driving Inspectio
159. be deleted or edited 90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e Press the PHONE button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Edit You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook entry that you wish to edit e Next choose the number designation home work mobile or pager that you wish to edit e When prompted recite the new phone number for the phonebook entry that you are editing After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in the phonebook call the number you just edited or return to the main menu Phonebook Edit can be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already exists in the phonebook For example the entry John Doe may have a mobile and a home number but you can add John Doe s work number later using the Phonebook Edit feature Delete UConnect Phonebook Entry NOTE Editing phonebook entries is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Delete e After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu you will then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to delete You can either say the name of a phonebook entry that you wish to delete or you can say List Names to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook from which you choose To select one of the
160. be crushed Never get any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift Do not raise this vehicle using a bumper jack The scissor jack is designed as a tool for changing tires on this vehicle only It is not recommended that the jack be used for service purposes or to lift more than one wheel at a time Preparations 1 Park the vehicle on a firm level surface Avoid icy or slippery areas WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel 2 Set the parking brake 3 Place the shift lever in PARK automatic transmission On 4 Wheel Drive vehicles shift the transfer case to the 4L position 6 4 Turn the ignition OFF 5 Turn on the Hazard Warning Flasher 338 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME 6 Block both the front and rear of the WARNING Continued Always park on a firm level surface as far from wheel diagonally opposite the jacking position For example if the right front a l wheel is being changed block the left the edge of the roadway as possible before raising eur T rear wheel the vehicle Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised NOTE Passengers should
161. cated directly behind the child restraint The routing loops are located behind the flip down door on the cab back panel padded bolster positions Tether Strap Routing 3 Remove the slack in the tether strap so that the anchor strap is pulled tight Tether Strap Routing Loop ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 Tether Straps at the Rear Passenger Seat Crew Cab 1 Route the child restraint tether strap under the head restraint for the outboard seating positions and then through the anchor strap outer loop webbing material loop located directly behind the child restraint 2 Route the tether strap across to the nearest installed anchor strap and attach the tether strap hook to the anchor strap inner metal ring 3 Remove the slack in the tether strap so that both anchor straps are pulled tight NOTE Two anchors must be used for any of the three seating positions Multiple Child Restraints 1 Inner Anchor Strap Rings 4 Passenger Side Rear Child Seat 2 Snap Hook 5 Center Rear Child Seat 3 Tether Strap 6 Drivers Side Rear Child Seat 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to seat failure and injury to the child In a collision the seat could come loose and allow the child to crash into the inside of the vehicle or other passengers or even be thrown from the vehicle Use only the anc
162. cellular phone can be used with the system at a time The system is available in English Spanish or French languages Phone Button The rearview mirror contains the microphone Jt for the system depending on the type of mirror and radio equipped and either the radio or the mirror has the two control buttons PHONE Button and VOICE RECOGNITION button that will enable you to access the system Voice Recognition Button Actual button location may vary with radio wae The individual buttons are described in the Operation section The UConnect system can be used with any Hands Free Profile certified Bluetooth cellular phone See the UConnect website for supported phones If your cellu lar phone supports a different profile e g Headset Profile you may not be able to use any UConnect features Refer to your cellular service provider or the phone manufacturer for details 84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se The UConnect system is fully integrated with the vehi cle s audio system The volume of the UConnect system can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control right switch if so equipped The radio display will be used for visual prompts from the UConnect system such as CELL or caller ID on certain radios Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the UConnect system and to navigate through the UConnect menu structure Voice
163. channels will be erased Individual channels cannot be erased The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Theft Alarm is active Troubleshooting Tips If you are having trouble programming HomeLink here are some of the most common solutions e Replace the battery in the original transmitter e Press the Learn button on the Garage Door Opener to complete the training for Rolling Code e Did you unplug the device for training and remember to plug it back in If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance General Information This device complies with FCC rules part 15 and Industry Canada RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli ance could void the user s authority to operate the device The term IC before the certification registration num ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifi cations were met ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS This vehicle has two 12 Volt au
164. ck the cooling system pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of engine coolant antifreeze from the radiator drain cock If the cap is sealing properly the engine coolant anti freeze will begin to drain from the coolant recovery bottle DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT Cooling System Drain Flush and Refill If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or contains a considerable amount of sediment clean and flush with a reliable cooling system cleaner Follow with a thorough ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 367 rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals Properly CAUTION Continued dispose of the old engine coolant antifreeze solution e Do not use plain water alone or alcohol based Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for engine coolant antifreeze products Do not use proper maintenance intervals additional rust inhibitors or antirust products as Selection Of Coolant they may not be compatible with the engine cool Use only the manufacturer s recommended engine cool ant antifreeze and may plug the radiator ant antifreeze Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genu This vehicle has not been designed for use with ine Parts in this section for correct fluid type Propylene Glycol based engine coolant anti freeze Use of Propylene Glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is not recommended CAUTION e Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze o
165. cked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station 342 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or WARNING Continued e Always park on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising hard stop could injure someone in the vehicle Al the vehicle ways stow the jack tools and the extra tire and wheel in the places provided Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised 8 Lower the jack to its fully closed position Stow the Apply the parking brake firmly before jacking replaced tire jack and tools as previously described Never start the engine with the vehicle on a jack 9 Adjust the tire pressure when possible ae let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a NOTE Do not oil wheel studs For chrome wheels do Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack not substitute with chrome plated wheel nuts Only use the jack in the positions indicated WARNING If working on or near a roadway be extremely careful of motor traffic Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to To assure that spare tires flat or inflated are securely stowed spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle Continued ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 343 To Stow the Flat or Spare Turn the wheel so that the valve stem is dow
166. cle Chains may break causing serious injury or death e Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow hooks Tow straps and chains may break causing serious injury CAUTION Tow hooks are for emergency use only to rescue a vehicle stranded off road Do not use tow hooks for tow truck hookup or highway towing You could damage your vehicle TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle Use of safety chains is recom mended Attach towing device to main structural mem bers of the vehicle not to bumpers or associated brackets State and local laws applying to vehicles under tow must be observed Four Wheel Drive Vehicles The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels OFF the ground Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of the vehicle raised and the opposite end on a towing dolly 348 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME Two Wheel Drive Vehicles Provided that the transmission is operable tow with the transmission in NEUTRAL and the ignition key in the OFF position along with the front wheels raised and the rear wheels on the ground The speed must not exceed 30 mph 50 km h and the distance must not exceed 15 miles 25 km If the vehicle is to be towed more than 15 miles 25 km or faster than 30 mph 50 km h it must be towed on a flatbed or with the rear wheels raised and the front wheels on the ground or with the
167. close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during airbag deployment could cause seri ous injury Airbags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel Continued 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING Continued SEE eau eG e If the vehicle has window bags they also need Knee Impact Bolsters room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window Sit upright in the center of the seat e Front Acceleration Sensors e Driver and Front Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioners Airbag System Components How the Airbag System Works The airbag system consists of the following e The Occupant Restraint Controller ORC determines Occupant Restraint Controller if a frontal collision is severe enough to require the e Side Remote Acceleration Sensors if equipped airbags to inflate The front airbag inflators are de signed to provide different rates of airbag inflation e Airbag Warning Light from direction provided by the ORC The ORC will not e Driver Airbag detect rollover e Passenger Airbag The ORC also monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in Window Bags above side windows if equipped the START or RUN position These include all of the e Steering Wheel and Column items listed above except the steering wheel and column and knee bolsters If the key is
168. commands are required after most UConnect system prompts You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options e Prior to giving a voice command one must wait for the beep which follows the Ready prompt or another prompt e For certain operations compound commands can be used For example instead of saying Setup and then Phone Pairing the following compound command can be said Setup Phone Pairing e For each feature explanation in this section only the combined form of the voice command is given You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it For example you can use the combined form voice com mand Phonebook New Entry or you can break the combined form command into two voice commands Phonebook and New Entry Please remember the UConnect system works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet meters away from you Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree in this section ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85 Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know your options at any prompt say Help following the beep The UConnect system will play all the options at any prompt if you ask for help To activate the UConnect system from idle simply press the PHONE button and follow the audible prompts for d
169. ct your authorized dealer for service assistance When pulling a heavy load or driving a fully performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer loaded vehicle when the humidity is low and the NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control temperature is high use a premium unleaded fuel systems can result in civil penalties being assessed to help prevent spark knock If spark knock per against you sists lighten the load or engine piston damage may result Continued 302 STARTING AND OPERATING M Carbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning e Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the vehicle Continued WARNING Continued e Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnor mal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open FLEXIBL
170. d Underhood Fuses Power Distribution Center Your vehicle is equipped with an electrical power distri bution center located on the left side of the engine compartment 382 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M corresponds to the following chart These fuses and relays can be obtained from your authorized dealer Cartridge Mini T Cavity Pass Fuse Description 1 Spare Spare 3 30 Amp Electric Brake Pink 4 50 Amp Power Seat Red 5 Spare 6 20Amp Ignition Off Draw Power Distribution Center Yellow IOD Cabin Com partment Node This center contains cartridge fuses mini fuses and CCN Radio relays A description of each fuse and component may be ae 2 7 10 Amp Powertrain Control stamped on the inside cover otherwise the cavity num Red Module PCM Fuel ber of each fuse is stamped on the inside cover that RAD AC Coils ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 383 Cavity uie T Description Cavity ces Te Description 8 10Amp Cabin Compartment 16 20 Amp Horn Red Node CCN Mirror Yellow 4x4 17 20 Amp ABS Feed Valves 9 Spare Yellow 10 2 Amp Low Current Ignition 18 20 Amp Fuel Pump Gray Switch Yellow 11 10 Amp AC Clutch 19 15 Amp Center High Mounted Red Blue Stop Light CHMSL 12 15 Amp _ Trailer Tow Lt Stop 20 20 Amp Cabin Compartment Blue Turn Yellow Node CCN Door 13 15 Amp Trailer Tow Rt Stop Loc
171. d cuts or sidewall cracks Check wheel nuts for tightness and tires for proper pressure Lights Check the operation of all exterior lights Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Door Latches Check for positive closing latching and locking Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel water oil or other fluid leaks Also if fuel fumes are detected the cause should be located and corrected UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS B Mirrors ee eneee ee 80 Inside Day Night Mirror 80 Outside Mirrors 00 00002 eae 80 Outside Mirrors Folding Feature If Equipped amp i ee Re RR ne henge IRR 80 Power MiffOtS 2ane we Rc x UR UR E 81 lll Hands Free Communication UConnect If Equipped iesu duos acris e pieces e qoe deg 82 Operation 3 63 3 eate ca PA ba 84 Phone Call Features sees 92 UConnect System Features Advanced Phone Connectivity Things You Should Know About Your UConnect System esce gra es General Information 00 lll Voice Recognition System VR If Equipped Voice Recognition System VR Operation Commands ees Voice Training oss eese a xo aea S a 76 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M
172. d miles kilometers of operation This should be considered as a normal part of the break in and not interpreted as an indication of difficulty SAFETY TIPS Exhaust System WARNING Exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide an ex tremely toxic gas that by itself is colorless and odorless To avoid inhaling these gases the following precautions should be observed e Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area e It may be necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for more than a short period If so adjust your climate control system to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed and the controls in any position except Off or Recirculation e The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Be aware of changes in the sound of the exhaust system exhaust fumes detected inside the vehicle or damage to the underside or rear of the vehicle Have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adja cent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Rep
173. d the system in your absence the horn will sound three times when you unlock the doors Check the vehicle for tampering The Vehicle Security Alarm system will also disarm if the vehicle is started with a programmed Sentry Key If an unprogrammed Sentry Key is used to start a vehicle the engine will run for two seconds and then shut down After six unsuccessful attempts at starting the engine the system will shut down until the correct key is used To 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M exit alarming mode press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button or start the vehicle with a programmed Sentry Key The Vehicle Security Alarm system is designed to protect your vehicle however you can create conditions where the system will arm unexpectedly If you remain in the vehicle and lock the doors with the RKE transmitter the alarm will sound when you pull the door handle to exit NOTE You may accidentally activate the Vehicle Secu rity Alarm System horn sounds and lights flash by entering the vehicle without using the RKE transmitter to unlock the door s The system can be disarmed with the RKE transmitter unlock button or by inserting a pro grammed Sentry Key into the ignition and turning the key to the ON position ILLUMINATED ENTRY Vehicles Equipped With Power Door Locks All interior lights will illuminate in the vehicle when the doors are unlocked using the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter The inter
174. der Main tenance Procedures in Section 7 When using the air conditioner in extremely heavy traffic in hot weather especially when towing a trailer additional engine cooling may be required If this situa tion is encountered operate the transmission in a lower gear and set the air conditioner to recirculation mode Operating the air conditioner in recirculation mode pro vides the maximum performance from your air condi tioning When stopped in heavy traffic it may be neces sary to shift into NEUTRAL and depress the accelerator slightly for fast idle operation Winter Operation When operating the system during the winter months make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of ice slush snow or other obstruc tions This will help prevent snow going into the ducts 234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Operation Tips Chart WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS HOT WEATHER AND VEHICLE INTERIOR IS VERY HOT 0 V CCS WARM WEATHER T ga COOL OR COLD HUMID CONDITIONS s d ub uL 566 COLD DRY CONDITIONS vm E WINDOW FOGGING Start the vehicle open the windows and turn the blower control knob to the high position full clockwise Set Mode control knob at or between 2 Jand Z Set temperature control to full cold and press the 3 button on After the hot air has been expelled close the windows and turn the mode control knob to the z setting counterclockwise at either
175. der by pressing the TUNE SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds INFO Button DISC Mode for MP3 WMA Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and radio will display song titles for each file 194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 WMA player cassette player or microphone and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to the proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down SEEK Button Auxiliary Mode No function SCAN Button Auxiliary Mode No function
176. des for a more level ride offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety The addition of a friction hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability Trailer sway control and a weight distributing load equalizing hitch are recommended for heavier tongue weights and may be required depending on vehicle and trailer configuration loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR requirements en STARTING AND OPERATING 313 WARNING An improperly adjusted weight distributing hitch may reduce handling stability and braking perfor mance and could result in an accident Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible with surge brake couplers Consult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable recreational vehicle dealer for additional information ae nnii EXAMPLE Without Weight Distributing Hitch Incorrect 314 STARTING AND OPERATING OSTATI ITNI EXAMPLE With Weight Distributing Hitch Correct EXAMPLE Improper Adjustment of Weight Distributing Hitch Incorrect en STARTING AND OPERATING 315 Trailer Hitch Classification The rear bumper is intended to tow trailers up to 2 000 lbs 907 kg without added equipment or alter ations to the standard equipment Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of trailers weighing over 2 000 Ibs 907 kg
177. display window Select the button 1 to 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC AUX Button Pressing the DISC AUX button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to DISC AUX mode 214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Operation Instructions CD MODE for CD and MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into th
178. ditions and with no occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle The front and rear curb weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are added Loading The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commer cial scale to ensure that the GVWR has not been ex ceeded The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle 310 STARTING AND OPERATING M should then be determined separately to be sure that the load is properly distributed over front and rear axle Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is within the specified GVWR If so weight must be shifted from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the specified weight limitations are met Store heavier items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed equally Stow all loose items securely before driving Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate WARNING Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR If you do parts on your vehicle can break or it can change the way your vehicle handles This could cause you to lose control
179. e Shift automatic transmission into PARK or shift manual transmission into NEUTRAL 328 STARTING AND OPERATING Se NOTE e Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met prior to depressing the NEUTRAL selection button and must continue to be met until 1 second elapses e Flashing NEUTRAL position indicator light indicates that shift requirements have not been met WARNING and the shift has been completed If any of these requirements with the exception of 3 key ON are not met prior to depressing the NEUTRAL button or are no longer met during the 1 second time then all of the mode position indicator lights will flash continu ously until all requirements are met or until the NEUTRAL button is released The ignition key must be ON for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable If the key is not ON the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the parking brake The transfer case NEUTRAL position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move despite the transmission position The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 329 CAUTION e Do not use a bumper mounted clamp on tow bar
180. e engine is allowed to cool CAUTION Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature light is on safely pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle in neutral with the air conditioner turned off until the light turns off If the light remains on turn the engine off immediately and call for service 170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M WARNING A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call a service center if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself see Section 7 of this manual Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph 8 Speedometer The speedometer shows the vehicle s speed 9 Charging System Light This light shows the status of the electrical charg ing system The light should come on when the ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light stays on or comes on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s non essential electrical devices or increase engine speed if at idle If the charging system light remains on it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY See an autho rized dealer 10 Vehicle Security Light The vehicle security light will flash rapidly for approxi mately 15 seconds when the vehicle security
181. e the Hazard Warning Flasher will continue to operate with the ignition key removed and the vehicle locked NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning Flasher may wear down your battery CHANGING A FLAT TIRE Jack Location In this vehicle the scissor jack and tire changing tools for Extended Cab models are stowed in a compartment under the rear passenger seat Crew Cab model scissor jack and tire changing tools are accessed by lifting up the rear passenger seat The jack is secured in place by turning the jack screw until the jack is secured into place A finger operated helper tool is provided to assist re moval and stowage of the jack This tool must be removed to operate the jack for changing the spare tire Jack Stowage Location Extended Cab WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 333 Jack Screw 334 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Se Jack Stowage Location Crew Cab WARNING The jack is designed as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes unless suitable supports are placed under the vehicle as a safety measure The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid icy or slippery areas Removing The Spare Tire Remove the spare tire before attempting to jack the truck Attach the wheel wrench to the jack extension tube Insert the tube through the access hole in the rear bumper and into the winch mechanism tube Rotate the wheel wrench ha
182. e CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the disc number the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism RES is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the other side is a CD should not be used and they can cause damage to the player ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215 EJECT Button Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE Bjecting with ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped
183. e chains on front wheels of vehicles Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pave ment Continued 290 STARTING AND OPERATING M CAUTION Continued e Observe the tire chain manufacturer s instructions on method of installation operating speed and conditions for usage Always use the lower sug gested operating speed of the chain manufacturer if different than the speed recommended by the manufacturer These cautions apply to all chain traction devices includ ing link and cable radial chains Tire chain use is permitted only on the rear tires of your vehicle NOTE The use of class S chains is permitted on your vehicle with P245 70R16 tires en STARTING AND OPERATING 291 CAUTION e Do not use tire chains on vehicles equipped with tires other than P245 70R16 There may not be adequate clearance for the chains and you are risking structural or body damage to your vehicle Do not use tire chains on the front wheels of your vehicle There may not be adequate clearance for the chains and you are risking structural or body damage to your vehicle SNOW TIRES Snow tires should be of the same size and type construc tion as the front tires Consult the manufacturer of the snow tire to determine any maximum vehicle speed requirement associated with the tire These tires should always be operated at the vehicle maximum capacity inflation pressures under any load condition While studded tires
184. e medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc LIST Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the Tune Scroll control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the Tune Scroll control knob will begin ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219 playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds INFO Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and the radio will display
185. e radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209 Voice Recognition System Radio If Equipped Refer to Voice Recognition System VR in Section 3 Voice Recognition Button UConnect Hands Free Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Hands Free Phone UConnect feature if equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With UConnect message will display on the radio screen Phone Button UConnect Hands Free Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Hands Free Phone UConnect feature if equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With UConnect message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button and the time of day will display In AM or FM mode pressing the TIME button will switch between the time and frequency displays Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune Scroll control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side T
186. e sensitive emergency locking mode is automatically activated Center Lap Belts The center seat position on the front seat bench has a lap belt only To fasten the lap belt slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click To lengthen the lap belt tilt the latch plate and pull To remove slack pull the loose end of the webbing Wear the lap belt snug against the hips Sit back and erect in the seat then adjust the belt as tightly as is comfortable 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Seat Belt Pretensioners The seat belts for front outboard seating positions are equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove any slack from the seat belt system in the event of a collision These devices improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early in a collision Pretensioners work for all size occupants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re straint Controller ORC Like the airbags the pretension ers are single use items After a collision that is severe enough to deploy the airbags and pretensioners both must be replaced Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Reminder System BeltAlert If the driver s seat belt has not been buckled within
187. e trying again If the engine has been flooded it may start to run but not have enough power to continue running when the key is released If this occurs continue cranking with the accel erator pedal pushed all the way to the floor Release the accelerator pedal and the key once the engine is running smoothly If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15 sec ond periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal held to the floor the normal starting procedure should be repeated After Starting The idle speed is automatically controlled and will de crease as the engine warms up ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED The engine block heater warms engine coolant and permits quicker starts in cold weather Connect the cord to a standard 110 115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded three wire extension cord The engine block heater cord is located at the right front of the engine compartment for all engine applications 242 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING Remember to disconnect the cord before driving Damage to the 110 115 Volt electrical cord could cause electrocution MANUAL TRANSMISSION WARNING You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended without having the parking brake fully applied The parking brake should al ways be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle especially on an incline CAUTION Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal o
188. ear and damage to the driveline components The transfer case NEUTRAL position is selected by depressing the recessed button located on the lower left hand corner of the 4WD Control Switch NOTE The transfer case NEUTRAL position is to be used for recreational towing only Refer to Recreational Towing in Section 5 for specific procedures on shifting into and out of NEUTRAL 252 STARTING AND OPERATING M Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights Transfer case position indicator lights are located on the instrument cluster If there is no indicator light on or flashing the transfer case position is in two wheel drive 2WD If the indicator light is on the desired position AWD LOCK and 4WD LOW has been obtained If One or More Shift Requirements are not Met 1 An indicator light will flash 2 The transfer case will not shift NOTE Before retrying a selection make certain that all the necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer case position have been met To retry the selection turn the control knob back to the current position wait five seconds and retry selection To find the shift require ments refer to the Shifting Procedure in this section The SVC 4WD warning light monitors the electric shift 4WD system If this light remains on after engine start up or illuminates during driving it means that the 4WD system is not functioning properly and that service is required WARNING Always engage t
189. ed by Towing Assistance Paging To learn how to page refer to Working with Automated Systems Paging works properly except for pagers of certain companies which time out a little too soon to work properly with the UConnect system Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems Working with Automated Systems This method is used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system You can use your UConnect system to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as a paging service or automated customer service line Some ser vices require immediate response selection In some instances that may be too quick for use of the UConnect system When calling a number with your UConnect system that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone sequence on your cellular phone keypad you can press the Voice Recognition button and say the sequence you wish to enter followed by the word Send For example if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 you can press the Voice Recognition button and say 3 7 4 6 Send Saying a number or sequence of 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME numbers followed by Send is also to be used for navigating through an automated customer service cen ter menu structure and to
190. ed to a window on your vehicle VIN Location Save this label for a convenient record of your vehicle identification number and optional equipment en INTRODUCTION 7 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS i Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or death THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS A Word About Your Keys 0 Ignition Key Removal sss Locking Doors With The Key H Steering Wheel Lock If Equipped If You Wish To Manually Lock The Steering Wheels uos nunute DR Ee IT ee REUS IU To Release The Steering Wheel Lock Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock DY SECM uoshe aiee adi S D ee ar dele icon ad lll Sentry Key Immobilizer System If Equipped li Vehicle Security Alarm System If Equipped To Set The Alarm caai aa Bil luminated Entry Replacement Keys 044 Customer Key Programming To Disarm The System 0 Vehicles Equipped With Power Door Locks 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se H Remote Keyless Entry ovas es do s 21 Powe
191. een ate ee Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Be cl ae ea es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS Ignition Key Removal The authorized dealer that sold you your vehicle has the key code numbers for your vehicle locks These numbers can be used to order duplicate keys from your authorized 1 Place the shift lever in PARK dealer Ask your authorized dealer for these numbers and keep them in a safe place Automatic Transmission 2 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position 3 Remove the key from the ignition lock cylinder 8163e6a8 Ignition Key Ignition Switch Positions 1 ACC 4 ON RUN 2 LOCK 5 START 3 OFF NOTE If you try to remove the key before you place the shift lever in PARK the key may become temporarily trapped in the ignition cylinder If this occurs rotate the THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 key to the right slightly then remove the key as de scribed If a malfunction occurs the system will trap the key in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is inoperable The engine can be started and stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain service WARNING Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seri
192. eering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible Damage to the power steering pump may occur Power Steering Fluid Check Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected abnormal noises are ee STARTING AND OPERATING 267 apparent and or the system is not functioning as antici pated Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho rized dealer WARNING Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading Do not overfill Use only manufacturers recommended power steering fluid If necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces For correct fluid type refer to Power Steering Reservoir under Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section PARKING BRAKE The foot operated parking brake is positioned below the lower left corner of the instrument panel To release the parking brake pull the parking brake release handle NOTE The instrument cluster Brake Warning Light indicates only that the parking brake is applied You must be sure the parking brake is fully applied before leaving the vehicle 268 STARTING AND OPERATING ME the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever
193. el roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel e Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as possible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Wheel and Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or select a nonabrasive non acidic cleaner Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Only MOPAR cleaners are recommended Do not use oven cleaner Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels protective finish es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 379 YES Essentials Fabric Cleaning Procedure if equipped YES Essentials seats may be cleaned in the following manner e Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean dry towel e Blot any remaining stain with a clean damp towel e For tough stains apply MOPAR Total Clean or a mild soap solution to a clean damp cloth and remove stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e For grease stains apply MOPAR Multi Purpose Cleaner to a clean damp cloth and remove stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e Do not use any solvents or protectants on Yes Essen tials products Interior Care Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean fabric upholst
194. elease the learn or training button The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer NOTE There are 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the Learn button has been pressed 7 Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink button twice holding the button for 2 sec onds each time If the device is plugged in and activates programming is complete If the device does not activate press the button a third time for 2 seconds to complete the training If you are have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels Gate Operator Canadian Programming Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig nals to time out or quit after several seconds of ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 transmission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor If you are having difficulties programming a garage door opener or a gate operator replace Programming HomeLink Step 3 wit
195. elected position indica tor light will continue to flash until all the requirements for the selected position have been met To retry a shift return the control knob back to the original position make certain all shift requirements have been met wait five seconds and try the shift again 2WD to 4WD LOCK or 4WD LOCK to 2WD Rotate the 4WD Control Switch to the desired position Shifts between 2WD and 4WD LOCK can be done with the vehicle stopped or in motion With the vehicle in motion the transfer case will engage disengage faster if you momentarily release the accelerator pedal after turn ing the control switch If the vehicle is stopped the ignition key must be in the ON position with the engine either RUNNING or OFF This shift cannot be completed if the key is in the ACC position NOTE On vehicles equipped with Anti Lock Brake Systems the 4x4 system will not allow shifts between 2WD 4WD LOCK if the rear wheels are spinning no traction In this situation the selected position indicator light will flash and the original position indicator light 256 STARTING AND OPERATING ME will remain ON At this time reduce speed and stop spinning the wheels to complete the shift There may be a delay up to 10 seconds for the shift to complete after the wheels have stopped spinning 4WD LOCK to AWD LOW or 4WD LOW to AWD LOCK NOTE When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW some gear noise may be heard This noise is normal and is n
196. electric defrosters or windshields equipped with a windshield wiper de icer Do not use scrapers or other sharp instru ments which may scratch the elements When cleaning the rearview mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft tissue ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 381 FUSES CAUTION When replacing a blown fuse it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating The Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage will also weaken the fabric If the belts need cleaning use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the car to wash them Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it suggests a problem in the circuit that must be correcte
197. ent of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump therefore you should ask your gasoline retailer whether gasoline contains MMT It is even more important to look for gasolines without MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United States MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline Materials Added To Fuel All gasolines sold in the United States are required to contain effective detergent additives Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions and would result in unnecessary cost There fore you should not have to add anything to the fuel Fuel System Cautions CAUTION Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s performance e The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor mance damage the emission control system Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 301 CAUTION Continued e The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane enhancers is not recommended Many of these products contain high concentra CAUTION Continued e An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke your engine may be out of tune tions of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle or malfunctioning and may require immediate service Conta
198. ent cluster indicates the transmission gear selected The shift lever is mounted on the right side of the steering column To drive move the shift lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the desired drive position Pull the shift lever toward you when shifting into REVERSE SECOND FIRST or PARK or when shifting out of PARK Gear Ranges DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL position into another gear range PARK PARK supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply ee STARTING AND OPERATING 247 the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range Always apply the parking brake first then place the shift lever into the PARK position WARNING e Never use PARK position on an automatic trans mission as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal REVERSE Use the REVERSE range only after the vehicle has come to
199. er Cylinder sorrienni eia n e 371 Parking 9 264 ace bad dbs ates Geek Hea eed 267 Warning Light 0 00000 170 174 Brake Transmission Interlock 246 Break In Recommendations New Vehicle 70 Bulb Replacement aese rma ciee e a E i 387 Bulbs Light cress s02e3 RE raed eh ees 387 Calibration Compass 0000000 140 Camper iac acd ae wee aA OR UR RR RR 157 Capacities Fluid s acere cedri 396 Caps Filler Oil Engine a gio cR Rp RIDE RII 357 Power Steering cuu RE a A EE Red 266 Radiator Coolant Pressure 368 Car Washes xus Sut ad see uhh aac andig a Aaa d 377 Carbon Monoxide Warning 158 302 Cargo Light 226085 Rr E ERR 126 Cargo Vehicle Loading eiet setare orewa 308 Cellular Phone llle 82 228 Center High Mounted Stop Light 391 Certification Label 0 0 0 0 0 00000 308 Changing A Flat Tire 0 0005 332 ame 343 HO 430 INDEX ae Chart lire Sizing sacs veiba prd me Re es 273 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator Bru PI rc EP 354 Child Restralnt lt lt rue RRRRRES SRI 58 59 Child Restraint Tether Anchors 61 66 Child Seat s ke ex aa de wee 63 Cleaning Wheels i212 ra 3 y ees 378 Climate Control eres esed esc ac ae RR ee Gad 228 Clock 14s e EPA ERE 179 182 196 199 209 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 227 Compact Spare Tire 6 0 ee ee eee 2
200. ery battery may freeze Do not attempt jump starting because the battery could rupture or explode The battery temperature must be brought up above lae losion freezing point before attempting jump start PE Damage to charging system of booster vehicle or of immobilized vehicle 6 Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery let the engine idle a few minutes then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery 7 When removing the jumper cables reverse the above sequence exactly Be careful of the moving belts and fan 346 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE If vehicle becomes stuck in snow sand or mud it can often be moved by a rocking motion Move the shift lever rhythmically between FIRST and REVERSE while apply ing slight pressure to the accelerator The least amount of accelerator pedal pressure to main tain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels or racing the engine is most effective Allow the engine to idle with the shift lever in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking motion cycles This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmis sion failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with emergency tow hooks 81c8b51c Tow Hooks ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 347 WARNING e Chains are not recommended for freeing a stuck vehi
201. ery and carpeting Interior trim should be cleaned starting with a damp cloth a damp cloth with MOPAR Total Clean then MOPAR Spot amp Stain Remover if absolutely necessary Do not use harsh cleaners or Armorall Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery Use MOPAR Vinyl Cleaner to clean vinyl upholstery and trim Leather Seat Care and Cleaning MOPAR Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather upholstery Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth 380 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR Total Clean Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents deter gents or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning inside rear windows equipped with
202. esigned with features to promote outside air circulation There are grilles in the cab back panel These are air exhausters that provide the means for regular exchange of cab air 232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Side window demisters direct airflow specifically to the window glass to help prevent interior fogging of the glass They are located in the extreme outside upper edges of the instrument panel The demisters also pro vide extra air ducts for circulation They are in operation whenever the Floor Mix Defrost or Bi Level modes are in use NOTE When you turn off the engine you may hear a hissing sound from under the hood for a short period of time This is a normal condition that occurs if the air conditioning system has been on It is not an indication of a problem with the air conditioning system Operating Tips Fast Cooldown For a fast cooldown open the windows and turn the blower fan rotary knob to the extreme right position turn the mode control to the panel fresh position press the SNOWFLAKE button to turn on the air conditioning and drive with the windows open for the first few minutes Once the hot air has been expelled close the windows and turn the mode selector to the Recirculation Panel Mode or Recirculation Mode Bi level position When a comfortable condition has been reached choose a mode position and adjust the temperature control knob and blower speed as necessary to maintain comfort For
203. ess Therefore the user can only answer an incoming call or ignore it Making a Second Call While Current Call in Progress To make a second call while you are currently on a call press the Voice Recognition button and say Dial or Call followed by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second call is in progress To go back to the first call refer to Toggling Between Calls in this section To combine two calls refer to Conference Call in this section Place Retrieve a Call From Hold To put a call on hold press the PHONE button until you hear a single beep This indicates that the call is on hold To bring the call back from hold press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a single beep Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press the PHONE button until you hear a single beep indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched Only one call can be placed on hold at one time Conference Call When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Three Way Calling To initiate three way calling press the Voice Recogni tion button while a call is in progress and make a second phone call as described under Making a Second Call While Current Call i
204. essary 3 Inspect the front and rear axle fluid Inspect the CV joints Inspect the exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary change if you are using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing O O O C M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 407 60 000 Miles 100 000 km or 60 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the ignition cables 3 7L engine Replace the spark plugs 3 7L engines Replace the top row of spark plugs 4 7L engines Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary LODODODOLDUD6L Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following trailer towing snow plowing heavy loading taxi police delivery service commercial service off road desert operation or more than 50 of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C Change the automatic transmission fluid amp filter if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Change the transfer
205. esume operation ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 Windshield Washers To use the washer push in on the washer knob on the end of the multifunction lever and hold while spray is desired If the washer knob is depressed while in the delay range the wiper will operate for several seconds after the washer knob is released It will then resume the intermittent interval previously selected If the washer knob is pushed for a period greater than one second while in the off position the wiper will wipe approxi mately three wipes after the wash knob is released To prevent freeze up of your windshield washer system in cold weather select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers TILT STEERING COLUMN This feature will allow you to raise or lower the steering wheel into a desired position To tilt the column pull rearward on the lever below the turn signal control and move the wheel up or down as desired Push the lever Tilt Steering Column Lever 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Tilting the steering column while the vehicle is moving is dangerous Without a stable steering col umn you could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident Adjust the column only while the ve hicle is stopped Be sure it is locked before driving ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED The
206. f gasoline before considering service for the vehicle Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications the World wide Fuel Charter WWFC which define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions performance and durability for your vehicle The manufacturer recom mends the use of gasoline that meets the WWFC speci fications if they are available Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gaso line Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality We strongly support the use of reformulated gasolines Properly blended reformulated gasolines will provide excellent performance and durability for the engine and fuel system components Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as 10 ethanol MTBE and ETBE Oxygen ates are required in some areas of the country during the Winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 299 CAUTION DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or E85 Ethanol Use of these blends may result in starting and drivability problems and may damage critical fuel system components Problems that result from using methanol gasoline or E85
207. f the reading before and after the service so that the correct mileage can be determined 17 Fog Light Indicator If Equipped 40 The fog light indicator shows when the fog lights are ON 18 Transmission Temperature Indicator This light indicates that there is excessive trans mission fluid temperature that might occur with severe usage such as trailer towing If this UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173 light comes on stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or faster with the transmission in NEUTRAL until the 19 Electronic Throttle Control ETC If Equipped The Electronic Throttle Control ETC light 7 If a problem is detected the light will come on while the engine is running If the light remains drivable however see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the engine experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing The and remain on for 15 seconds as a bulb check If the light does not come on during starting have the system light goes off informs you of a problem with the ETC system lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be is running immediate service is required and you may light will come on when the ignition is first turned ON checked by an authorized dealer 174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME 20 Brake System Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions
208. f your vehicle NOTE After you read the manual it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with the vehicle when sold so that the new owner will be aware of all safety warnings When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best has the factory trained technicians and genuine Mopar parts and is interested in your satisfaction HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire The detailed Index at the back of this Owner s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual INTRODUCTION 5 TEES 6 INTRODUCTION M WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS NOTE It is illegal to remove the VIN This Owner s Manual contains WARNINGS against op erating procedures that could result in an accident or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against proce dures that could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number VIN is located on the left front corner of the instrument panel pad visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield This number also appears on the Automobile Information p Disclosure Label affix
209. faster than you want You could lose control and have an acci dent Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed push and release the RESUME button Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph 32 km h 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To Vary The Speed Setting When the Electronic Speed Control System is ON the speed can be increased by pressing and holding the RESUME ACCEL button When the button is released a new set speed will be established Tapping the ACCEL button once will result in a speed increase of 1 mph 2 km h Each time the button is tapped speed increases so that tapping the button three times will increase speed by 3 mph 4 8 km h Tapping the DECEL button once will result in a speed decrease of 1 mph 2 km h Each time the button is tapped speed will decrease For example tapping the button three times will decrease the speed by 3 mph 4 8 km h To decrease the speed while the Electronic Speed Control is on press and hold the DECEL button Release the button when the desired speed is reached and the new speed will be set To Accelerate For Passing Depress the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed NOTE When driving uphill at elevations above 2 000 ft 610 m or when the vehicle is heavily loaded especially when towing the vehicle may slow below the
210. front end raised and the rear wheels on a towing dolly NOTE Towing the vehicle with the rear wheels on the ground at more than 30 mph 50 km h or for more than 15 miles 25 km can cause severe transmission damage MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS Bl Engine Compartment 3 7L 351 Bl Engine Compartment 4 7L 352 ll Onboard Diagnostic System OBDII 353 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 353 ll Emissions Inspection And Maintenance Programs xke ne x SR EROR RR 354 Bl Replacement Parts 0000 355 W Dealer Service ee 356 Bl Maintenance Procedures 005 356 Engine Oil Engine Oil Filter Engine Air Cleaner Filter Maintenance Free Battery Air Conditioner Maintenance Drive Shaft Constant Velocity Joints Body Lubrication Windshield Wiper Blades Windshield Washers 350 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Exhaust System 0 0 0000000000 363 W Replacement Light Bulbs 387 Cooling System p aae aE aE A EES 366 W Bulb Replacement 0 0 387 Brake System otec isses r re e LARA 371 Headlight Halogen Front Park And Turn Clutch Hydraulic System
211. g but not limited to e Driving style e Tire pressure e Distance driven ee STARTING AND OPERATING 287 WARNING Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed Refer to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicators Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the size designation of your tire The service description and load identification will be found on the original equipment tire Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety handling and ride of your vehicle We recommend that you contact your original equipment or an autho rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability 288 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING WARNING Continued e Failure to equip your vehicle wi
212. g one of the following commands REPEAT to repeat a memo NEXT to play the next memo PREVIOUS to play the previous memo DELETE to delete a memo e DELETE ALL to delete all memos System Setup To switch to system setup say Setup In this mode you may say the following commands e Language English e Language French e Language Spanish e Tutorial e Voice Training NOTE Keep in mind that you have to press the VR hard key first and wait for the beep before speaking the barge in commands es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the UConnect system Voice Training feature may be used 1 Press the VR hard key speak System Setup and once you are in that menu then speak Voice Training This will train your own voice to the system and will improve recognition 2 Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the UConnect System For best results the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched OFF This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only SEATS Manual Seat Adjustment The adjusting lever is at the front of the seat near the floor Lift the lever and move the seat to the desired position Release the bar t
213. g steps 1 Cut the additional Sentry Key Transponder blank s to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se 2 Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON position for at least three seconds but no longer than 15 seconds Then turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the first key 3 Insert the second valid key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON position within 15 seconds After 10 seconds a chime will sound In addition the Vehicle Security Light will begin to flash Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the second key 4 Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON position within 60 seconds After 10 seconds a single chime will sound In addition the Vehicle Security Light will stop flashing To indicate that programming is complete the Vehicle Security Light will turn on again for three seconds and then turn off The new Sentry Key is programmed The Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter will also be pro grammed during this procedure Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys If you do not have a programmed Sentry Key contact your authorized dealer for details NOTE Ifa programmed key is lost see your authorized dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the sys tem s memory This will p
214. h 20 to 40 lbs 9 to 18 kg and are older than one year old These child seats are also held in the vehicle by the seat belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System in this section e The belt positioning booster seat is for children weigh ing more than 40 Ibs 18 kg but who are still too small to fit the vehicle s seat belts properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the seat cushion while the child s back is against the seatback they need a belt positioning booster seat The child and booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt Children Too Large for Booster Seats e Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seat back should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat e Make sure that the child is upright in the seat e The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING Continued Check belt fit periodically A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm For additional information refer to www seatcheck org WARNING e Improper installation can lead
215. h is deadly the exhaust system on vehicles equipped with Cap or Slide In Campers should extend beyond the overhang ing camper compartment and be free of leaks TAILGATE Tailgate Removal To simplify mounting a camper unit with an overhang the tailgate can be removed quickly Follow these steps 1 Open the tailgate to a 45 degree angle 2 Unclip and remove the cables from the box while maintaining a 45 degree angle eee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159 1 Slide the tailgate onto the driver s side pivot 2 Hold the tailgate at a 45 degree angle and insert it into the passenger side pivot 3 Clip the cables to the box E Two Position Tailgate Upper Load Platform Your tailgate can be opened to the full open or the partial open position The partial open position is for loading objects longer than the length of the bed sheets of plywood etc by creating an upper load platform Installing Lumber Tailgate Cable 3 Lift the tailgate off of the pivot on the passenger side by pulling upward and rearward at the same time 1 Place lumber across the box in the indentations pro vided above the wheel housings and in the bulkhead dividers to form the floor There are indents in the sheet 4 Slide the tailgate to the passenger side while making metal or bed liner if equipped on the inner side of the sure clearance from the box and taillight is maintained box in front Club Cab only and behind both w
216. h oe CA A mb PUPPES P ihe 70 Pets Transporting llle 70 Phone Cellular i reves 82 Phone Hands Free UConnect 82 Pickup BOX Lbs n bra PO OE a sss 159 Placard Tire and Loading Information 276 Power Distribution Center Fuses 381 Door Locks 3 5 39233 bed ROSE Re 20 29 MITOS nn c 9 EGO Re x ok REG GOES RR 81 Outlet Auxiliary Electrical Outlet 149 DLCCTING cbe e ides en opa edu ta 266 WindOWS 1 624544 beet eee eme m E 34 Power Steering Fluid 398 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 45 Preparation for Jacking 04 337 Pretensioners Seat Belis cis ande ed ask x ey ae hE SG eS 44 Programming Transmitters Remote Keyless Entry ise eem RR Eo ood aeons PES 25 Quad Cab 132223 pese Eg ate bee EUROS RE 120 Radial Ply Tires oed RR 283 Radiator Cap Coolant Pressure Cap 366 368 Radio Operation s cese esegue S 228 Radio Satellite llle 221 Rear Axle Differential 376 Rear Cargo Area Utility Rails 155 Rear Convenience Storage Crates 151 Rear Window 0 000 eee eee a 157 Rear Window Defroster 0 00005 156 Rear Window Features 2 055 156 Rearview Mirrors lees 80 Reclining Front Seats 0000 116 en INDEX 439 Recorder Event Data 0 0 00 ee 56 Recreational Towing srest acier t eriam tah 3
217. h the following 3 Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release every two seconds cycle your hand held transmitter until HomeLink has successfully accepted the frequency signal The indicator s will change from a slow flash to a rapid flash when trained If you unplugged the device for training plug it back in at this time Then proceed with Step 4 under Programming HomeLink earlier in this section Using HomeLink To operate simply press and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the trained device i e garage door opener gate operator security system entry door lock home office lighting etc The hand held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button for 20 seconds until the indicator s starts to flash Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with PRO GRAMMING HOMELINK Step 2 and follow all remaining steps Security It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the indicators begin to flash Note that all
218. hannel pausing for eight seconds before con tinuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time INFO Button Except REU Radio Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa tion between Artist Song Title and Composer if avail able Also pressing and holding the INFO button for an 224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M additional three seconds will make the radio display the Song Title all of the time press and hold again to return to normal display INFO Button REU Radio Pressing the INFO button will display information about Artist Song Title and Composer if available Pressing the INFO button again will close the INFO screen RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows TUNE Control Rotary Turn the rotary Tune Scroll control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel MUSIC TYPE Button Except REU Radio Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the Tune Scroll control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the same selected Music Type name If
219. he brightness of the instrument panel lighting can be regulated by rotating the dimmer control up brighter or down dimmer When the headlights are on you can supplement the brightness of the odometer trip odom eter radio and overhead console by rotating the control up until you hear a click This feature is termed the Parade mode and is useful when headlights are re quired during the day If the dimmer control is not in this position the audio display may be difficult to read if the headlights are on during the daytime 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 81482f6a Dimmer Control NOTE Club Cab Quad Cab models may have an optional switched dome lamp that is operated by press ing the lens Battery Saver To protect the life of your vehicle s battery Load Shed ding is provided for both the interior and exterior lights If the ignition is OFF and any door is left ajar for 15 minutes or the dimmer control is rotated upwards for 15 minutes the interior lights will automatically turn off If the headlights remain on while the ignition is cycled OFF the exterior lights will automatically turn off after eight minutes If the headlights are turned on and left on for eight minutes while the ignition is OFF the exterior lights will automatically turn off NOTE Battery Saver mode is cancelled if the ignition is ON ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 Headlight Delay To aid in your exit
220. he driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions The system operates with a separate computer to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent wheel lock up and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces The system s pump motor runs during an ABS stop to provide regulated hydraulic pressure The pump motor makes a low humming noise during operation which is normal The ABS includes an amber ABS warning light When the light is illuminated the ABS is not functioning The system reverts to standard non anti lock brakes Turning the ignition OFF and ON again may reset the ABS if the fault detected was only momentary WARNING Pumping of the Anti Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to an accident Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop en STARTING AND OPERATING 271 WARNING When you are in a severe braking condition involving use of the ABS you will experience some pedal drop as e Anti Lock Brake Systems ABS cannot prevent the vehicle comes to a stop This is the result of the the natural laws of physics from acting on the system reverting to the base brake system vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded Engagement of the ABS may be accompanied by a pulsing sensation You may also hear a
221. he parking brake when powering down the vehicle if the SVC 4WD light is illumi nated Not engaging the parking brake may allow the vehicle to roll which may cause personal injury NOTE Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front or rear wheels are spinning The NV233 243 trans fer case is not equipped with a synchronizer and there fore the front and rear driveshaft speeds must be equal for the shift to take place Shifting while only the front or rear wheels are spinning can cause damage to the trans fer case es STARTING AND OPERATING 253 WARNING When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW the engine speed is approximately three times that of the 2WD or 4WD LOCK positions at a given road speed Take care You or others could be injured if you leave the not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the 40 km h NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the parking brake The transfer case NEUTRAL position Proper operation of 4 wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size type and circumference on each wheel Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the transfer case disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move regardless of the transmission position The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is Because 4 wheel drive provides improved traction there not in the vehicle is
222. he temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced Be sure to follow the warnings which apply to your spare Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control DO NOT install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare DO NOT install more than one compact spare tire wheel on the vehicle at any given time CAUTION Because of the reduced ground clearance DO NOT take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the compact spare installed Damage to the vehicle may result Limited Use Spare If Equipped The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use on your vehicle This tire is identified by a limited use spare tire warning label located on the limited use spare tire and wheel assembly This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your ee STARTING AND OPERATING 285 vehicle but it is not Installation of this limited use spare Tire Spinning tire affects vehicle handling Since it is not the same tire When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions DO replace or repair the original tire and reinstall on the NOT spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph vehicle at the first opportunity 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck 1 WARNAE For additional information refer to Freei
223. he two time or frequency is displayed Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the TUNE AUDIO con trol knob 180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 3 After the hours are adjusted push the TUNE AUDIO control knob to set the minutes 4 Adjust the minutes by turning the TUNE AUDIO control knob 5 To exit press any button knob or wait approximately five seconds SALES CODE REQ AM FM STEREO RADIO AND 6 DISC CD DVD CHANGER MP3 WMA AUX JACK NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of your radio faceplate REQ Radio Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181 Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Press the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned ON the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek
224. hecking or replenishing fluid make certain that the dipstick cap is properly reseated It is normal for the dipstick cap to spring back slightly from its fully seated position as long as its seal remains engaged in the dipstick tube Selection of Lubricant It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the transmission to assure optimum transmission perfor mance Use only the manufacturer s recommended trans mission fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type It is important that the transmission fluid be maintained at the prescribed level using the recommended fluid Special Additives Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supple mental additives Therefore do not add any fluid addi tives to the transmission The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks In addition avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 375 CAUTION CAUTION Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac turer s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and or torque converter shudder Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer s recommended fluid will result in more frequent fluid and filter changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this sec tion for the
225. heel To reinstall the tailgate do the following housings 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 4 Snap the tailgate support cable between the cable guide and the tailgate bumper Do this on both sides of the tailgate 1 Bulkhead Divider Slot 2 Wheel Housing Indentions 2 Secure the tailgate in the partially open position Tailgate Guide 3 Open the tailgate slightly ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161 To return the tailgate to the full open position CAUTION Continued 1 Lift up on the tailgate e Loading should not exceed 400 lbs 181 kg of 2 Remove both cables from between the cable guides material suspended above the wheelhouse and and the tailgate bumpers and lower the tailgate partially open tailgate or vehicle damage may result CAUTION e Care should always be exercised when operating a vehicle with cargo Vehicle speeds may need to be reduced Severe turns or rough roads may cause shifting or bouncing of the cargo that may result in vehicle damage Ensure the load is securely tied down and is properly identified according to local laws if it extends beyond the tail lights Continued UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS E Instruments And Controls 166 WM Instrument Cluster 0 000005 167 Mi Instrument Cluster Description 168 Bi Electronic Digital Clock 179 Clock
226. hicle This could result in a flash fire causing serious personal injury Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic Turn the ignition switch to the START position and release when the engine starts If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds turn the key to the OFF position wait 5 seconds then repeat the starting procedure Extreme Cold Weather below 20 F or 29 C transmission cannot be started this way Unburned To insure reliable starting at these temperatures use of an fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once externally powered electric engine block heater available the engine has started ignite and damage the from your dealer is recommended converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a dis charged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle This type of start can be dan gerous if done improperly Refer to Jump Starting in Section 6 and follow them carefully en STARTING AND OPERATING 241 If the engine fails to start after you have followed the normal starting procedure it may be flooded Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there while cranking the engine This should clear any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded CAUTION To prevent damage to the starter do not crank the engine for more than 15 seconds at a time Wait 10 to 15 seconds befor
227. hicles equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button use the Tune Scroll control to select SET CLOCK and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 For vehicles not equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary Tune Scroll control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary Tune Scroll control knob and BASS will display Turn the Tune Scroll control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones Push the rotary Tune Scroll control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the Tune Scroll control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary Tune Scroll control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the Tune Scroll control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201 Push the rotary Tune Scroll control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the Tune Scroll control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary Tune Scroll control knob a f
228. high humidity conditions it may be necessary to remain in the Recirculation mode to maintain comfort Window Fogging Windows will fog on the inside when the humidity inside the vehicle is high This often occurs in mild or cool temperatures when it s rainy or humid In most cases turning on the Air conditioning pressing the SNOW FLAKE button will clear the fog Adjust the temperature control air direction and blower speed to maintain comfort ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233 As the temperature gets colder it may be necessary to direct air onto the windshield by using MIX Mode position on the control Adjust the temperature control and blower speed to maintain comfort High blower speeds will reduce fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by selecting the defrost mode Regular cleaning of the inside of the windows with a non filming cleaning solution vinegar and water works very well will help prevent contaminates cigarette smoke perfumes etc from sticking to the windows Contaminates on the inside of windows can increase the rate of window fogging Summer Operation Air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant during summer to provide proper corrosion protection and to raise the boiling point of the coolant for protection against overheating A 50 concentration of engine coolant to distilled water is recommended Refer to Cooling System un
229. his If the indicator is dark or shows a green dot proceed as follows 1 Wear eye protection and remove all metal jewelry such as watch bands or bracelets which might make an unintended electrical contact 2 Park the booster vehicle within cable reach but with out letting the vehicles touch Set the parking brake place the automatic transmission in PARK and turn the ignition OFF on both vehicles 3 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electrical loads 4 Connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive terminal of the booster battery Connect the other end of the same cable to the positive terminal of the discharged battery could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result 5 Connect the other cable first to the negative terminal of the booster battery and then to the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery Make sure you have a good contact to a metal surface of the engine block WARNING e Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the discharge battery The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode Continued ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 345 WARNING Continued WARNING During cold weather when temperatures are be Any procedure other than above could result in low freezing point electeolyte in A 0 5 h rpeo e Personal injury caused by electrolyte squirting out the battery vent Personal injury or property damage due to batt
230. home or on your own street en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 Research has shown that seat belts save lives and that they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times Lap Shoulder Belts All seating positions except the front center seating position with full bench seat have combination lap shoulder belts The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or collisions This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions But in a collision the belt will lock and reduce the risk of your striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out WARNING e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Continued 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING Continued Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions e Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous
231. hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages Next attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the anchorage bars pushing aside the seat cover material Then attach the tether strap to the anchorage located on the back of the seat being careful to route the tether strap to provide the most direct path between the anchor and the child restraint If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints raise the head restraint and route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the two posts Finally tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat removing slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer s instructions NOTE When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children It is recommended that before installing the child restraint buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation instead of tucking the seat belt behind the child restraint route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it This should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are
232. hor positions directly behind the child restraint to secure a child restraint top tether strap See your authorized dealer for help if necessary Transporting Pets Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine in your vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri mental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur The recommended viscosity and quality grades are E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 shown under Engine Oil under Maintenance Proce dures in section 7 of this manual NON DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousan
233. ic trouble code s and warning lamp status for electronically controlled safety systems including the airbag system e Time of airbag deployment in terms of ignition cycles and vehicle mileage Airbag deployment level if applicable Impact acceleration and angle Seat belt status Brake status service and parking brakes Accelerator status including vehicle speed e Engine control status including engine speed e Transmission gear selection 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se e Cruise control status e Traction stability control status e Tire pressure monitoring system status if equipped Child Restraint Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the time babies and children too Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces require that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it Children 12 years and younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult seat belt Always check the child seat owner s manual to ensure you have the right seat for your child Use the restraint that is correct for your child Infants and Small Children e Safety e
234. ift into Overdrive and will automatically select the most desirable gear for operation at this temperature Normal operation will resume when the transmission fluid temperature has risen to a suitable level Refer to Torque Converter Clutch in this section ee STARTING AND OPERATING 249 If the transmission temperature gets extremely hot the transmission will automatically select the most desirable gear for operation at this temperature If the transmission temperature becomes hot enough the Trans Temp light may illuminate and the transmission may downshift out of Overdrive until the transmission cools down After cooldown the transmission will resume normal operation The transmission will downshift from Overdrive to DRIVE if the accelerator pedal is fully depressed at vehicle speeds above approximately 35 mph 56 km h When to Use TOW HAUL Mode TOW HAUL Switch When driving in hilly areas towing a trailer carrying a heavy load etc and frequent transmission shifting oc curs press the TOW HAUL switch This will improve performance and reduce the potential for transmission overheating or failure due to excessive shifting When 250 STARTING AND OPERATING Se operating in TOW HAUL mode 5th gear if equipped is disabled and 2 3 and 3 4 shift patterns are modified Shifts into Overdrive 4th gear are allowed during steady cruise for improved fuel economy and auto matic closed throttle downshifts to 3rd gear for
235. ifth time and FADE will display Turn the Tune Scroll control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary Tune Scroll control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade AM FM Button Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 to 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display 202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC Button Pressi
236. ifunction lever up to signal a right hand turn or down to signal a left hand turn You can signal a lane change by moving the lever partially up or down 814830fd Cargo Light Switch Multifunction Lever The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column 8196c9d5 Signaling Turns 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The arrow on either side of the instrument cluster flashes to indicate the direction of the turn and proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights If an indicator fails to light when the multifunction lever is moved it would suggest that the switch or indicator lamp is defective If a defective bulb or wiring circuit is detected for the turn signal system the arrow indicators will flash at a faster rate NOTE Ifa turn signal has been left on for at least a mile duration a continuous chime will sound Turn Signal Auto Mode Tap the multifunction lever once and the turn signal left or right will flash three times and automatically turn off Flash To Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steer ing wheel This will turn on the high beam headlights until the multifunction lever is released High Beam Low Beam Select Switch Pull the multifunction lever fully toward the steering wheel to switch the headlights from high or low beam ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICL
237. ile the battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage Air Conditioner Maintenance For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season This service should ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 361 include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time WARNING Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air condi tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode injuring you Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to Section 3 of the Warranty Information book for further warranty information The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced repairman NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C System Sealers Stop Leak Products Seal Conditioners Compres sor Oils and Refrigerants Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling R 134a air conditioning refrigerant is a hydrofluoro carbon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency EPA and
238. immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your authorized dealer and the manufacturer To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www safercargov or write to Administrator NHTSA 400 Seventh Street SW Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department immediately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should write to Transport Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investiga tions and Recalls 2780 Sheffield Road Ottawa Ontario K1B 3V9 ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 421 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals no P
239. in the OFF e Instrument Panel ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 position in the ACC position or not in the ignition the airbags are not on and will not inflate During a moderate to severe rear impact the ORC may only deploy the seat belt pretensioners e Also the ORC turns on the AIRBAG warn 9 ing light in the instrument cluster for six to N eight seconds for a self check when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the AIRBAG warning light will turn off If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the AIRBAG warning light either momen tarily or continuously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial start up WARNING Ignoring the AIRBAG warning light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the airbags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have the airbag system checked right away NOTE Children 12 years and younger should always ride buckled up in a rear seat in an appropriate child restraint e The Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and the right side of the instrument panel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the airbags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the front airbags Different airbag infla
240. ing System TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illumi nates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177 overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the sys tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the
241. ing the tire size two digits ABCD Code used by the tire manufacturer one to four digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured two digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured two digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 276 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Loading and Tire Pressure Tire and Loading Information Placard Tire Placard Location n NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 5 t1 on either the face of the driver s door or the driver s side THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS B Pillar NEVER EXCEED XXX 2 TIRE ORIGINAL TIRE SIZI P195 70R14 T125 70D15 set 3 200kPa 29PSI 420kPa 60PSI SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION RA 4N109268 J 811b5a9a Tire and Loading Information Placard This placard tells you important information about the 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 total weight your vehicle can carry ee STARTING AND OPERATING 277 3 tire size designed for your vehicle 4 cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires Loading The vehicle maximum load on the t
242. ing this item allows you to choose between wide screen pan scan and letter box AutoPlay If Equipped When this is set to On and a DVD video is inserted it will bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the movie In some rare cases the DVD player may not auto play the main title In such cases use the MENU button on the remote control to select desired title to play 188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se NOTE The user will have to set these defaults before loading a disc If changes are made to these settings after a disc is loaded changes will not be effective Also the defaults are effective only if the disc supports the customer preferred settings AM and FM Buttons Press the buttons to select AM or FM Modes SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total
243. ior lights will remain on for 30 seconds after the last door is closed or until all doors are closed and either the ignition is turned to the ON position or a RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed There is also a battery saver feature that will turn the interior lights off after eight minutes if the ignition is OFF and a door is left open or the dimmer control is in the interior lights ON position ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors or activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to a maxi mum of 66 ft 20 m using a Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system Remote Keyless Entry RKE Transmitter 1 Lock 2 Unlock NOTE The line of transmission must not be blocked with metal objects 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M To Unlock The Doors Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock only the driver s door or twice to unlock all the doors When the unlock button is pressed the illuminated entry will initiate and the parking lights will flash twice The system can be programmed to unlock all the doors upon the first unlock button press by using the following procedure 1 Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter 2 Continue to hold the LOCK button for at least 4 sec ond
244. ire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading section of this manual NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWRs for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWRs vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to Vehicle Loading in this section To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1 400 Ibs 635 kg and there will be
245. ire to resume speed Downshift progressively Do not skip gears to avoid overspeeding the engine and clutch WARNING Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid one gear at a time to prevent overspeeding the engine which can cause valve damage and or clutch disc damage even if the clutch pedal is depressed Maximum Recommended Downshift Speeds CAUTION Failure to follow the maximum recommended down shifting speeds may cause the engine to overspeed and or damage the clutch disc even if the clutch pedal is depressed ee STARTING AND OPERATING 245 Gear Selec 6to5 5to4 4to3 3to2 2tol tion Maxi 85 mph 75 mph 55 mph 35 mph 20 mph mum 135 120 88 56 32 Speed km h km h km h km h km h Reverse Shifting To shift into REVERSE bring the vehicle to a complete stop Depress the clutch and pause briefly to allow the gear train to stop rotating Beginning from the NEUTRAL position move the shift lever in one quick smooth motion straight across and into the REVERSE area the driver will feel a firm click as the shifter passes the knock over Complete the shift by pulling the shift lever into REVERSE The knock over prevents the driver from accidentally entering the REVERSE shift area and warns the driver that they are about to shift the transmission int
246. irections All UConnect system sessions begin with a press of the PHONE button on the radio control head Cancel Command At any prompt after the beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu However in a few instances the system will take you back to the previous menu Pair Link UConnect System to a Cellular Phone To begin using your UConnect system you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled cellular phone To complete the pairing process you will need to refer ence your cellular phone Owners Manual The UConnect website may also provide detailed instruc tions for pairing The following are general phone to UConnect system pairing instructions e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e When prompted after the beep say Pair a Phone and follow the audible prompts e You will be asked to say a four digit Personal Identi fication Number PIN which you will later need to enter into your cellular phone You can enter any four digit PIN You will not need to remember this PIN after the initial pairing process 86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M For identification purposes you will be prompted to give the UConnect system a name for your cellular phone Each cellular phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a prio
247. is also provided inside the driver side storage bin Power Outlet and Portable Phone Storage The console is equipped with a power outlet and an iPod phone storage bin The phone storage bin can be used when easy access to the phone is needed Also the power outlet inside the console compartment can be used to charge the phone while it is being stored in the bin The power outlet may be used for any portable item with a standard 12 Volt power plug Side Open Armrest Lid Pressing the button on the left side of the console opens the console armrest lid The armrest lid will remain open until the armrest lid is closed manually by pressing the lid back into place Two pen holders are provided on the es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 inside of the armrest lid A tissue holder is also provided on the inside of the armrest lid which holds a pocket size soft pack of tissue REAR CARGO AREA UTILITY RAILS CAUTION The maximum load per cleat should not exceed 320 Ibs 145 kg and the angle of the load on each cleat should not exceed 60 degrees above horizontal or damage to the cleat or cleat rail may occur There are four adjustable cleats that can be used to assist in securing cargo Each cleat must be located and tight ened down in one of the detentes along either rail in order to keep cargo properly secure To move the cleat to any position on the rail turn the nut counterclockwise approximately three turn
248. is an ozone saving prod uct However the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment Drive Shaft Constant Velocity Joints All 4 wheel drive models are equipped with four con stant velocity joints Periodic lubrication of these joints is not required However the joint boot should be inspected for external leakage or damage periodically If external leakage or damage is evident the joint boot and grease should be replaced immediately Continued operation 362 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Sx could result in failure of the joint due to water and dirt contamination of the grease This would require com plete replacement of the joint assembly Refer to the Service Manual for the detailed replacement procedure Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks door hinge pivot points and rollers liftgate tailgate sliding doors and hood hinges should be lubri cated periodically with a lithium based grease such as MOPAR Spray White Lube to assure quiet easy opera tion and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the application of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching compo nents to insure proper function When performing othe
249. itations until the engine is fully warmed up CAUTION Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85 in your vehicle It will cause difficulty in cold starting and may affect drivability Cruising Range Because E 85 fuel contains less energy per gallon Liter than gasoline you will experience an increase in fuel consumption You can expect your miles per gallon mpg miles per liter and your driving range to decrease by about 30 compared to gasoline operation Replacement Parts Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle FFV are designed to be compatible with ethanol Always be sure that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol com patible parts 306 STARTING AND OPERATING CAUTION Replacing fuel system components with non ethanol compatible components can damage your vehicle ADDING FUEL Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door When fueling the cap may be placed on the inside of the filler door Gas Cap Holder If the gas cap is lost or damaged be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle es STARTING AND OPERATING 307 CAUTION CAUTION Damage to the fuel system or emissions control system could result from using an improper fuel tank filler tube cap gas cap A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the fuel system WARNING e Never allow any lit smoking materials near the vehicle while removing the cap or filling the t
250. k on the CD currently playing TIME Button CD MODE Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF CD MODE Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Rewind button works in a similar manner AM or FM Button CD MODE Switches the Radio into the AM or FM Radio mode es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191 Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files The radio can play MP3 WMA files however acceptable MP3 WMA file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 WMA files pay attention to the following restrictions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 WMA file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 WMA DVD Video DVD R DVD RW DVD R DVD RW and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of directory levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders 100 e Maximum number of characters in file folder
251. km or 96 Months Maintenance Service 102 000 Miles 170 000 km or Schedule 102 Months Maintenance 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Service Schedule T Rotate tires J Change the engine oil and engine oil 1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the filter engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary T Rotate tires 1 Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary QO Replace the ignition cables 4 7L C1 Inspect the CV joints engines Q Inspect the exhaust system Q Replace the side row of spark plugs J Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary 4 7L engines J Flush and replace the engine coolant M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 412 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ME 108 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires 1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary 1 Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary 1 Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if
252. ks Brake Trans Blue Turn mission Shift Inter 14 20Amp lgnition Off Draw lock BTS Yellow IOD 2 21 25 Amp Audio Amp 15 25 Amp Trans Powertrain Natural Natural Control Module 22 20 Amp Power Outlet Switch PCM Yellow able 384 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cavity ra aaa Description Cavity ne T Description 23 20 Amp Fog Lamps 31 30 Amp Ignition Accessory Yellow Green Feed 24 20 Amp Powertrain Control 32 30 Amp Front Control Module Yellow Module PCM B Pink FCM 1 Ext Lights 25 15 Amp Cabin Compartment 1 Blue Node CCN Illumi 33 30 Amp Auto Shut Down nation Pink ASD 26 20 Amp Ignition Run Start 34 30 Amp Front Control Module Yellow Feed Pink FCM 2 Ext Light 27 10 Amp Power Mirror 2 Red 35 40 Amp HVAC Blower Motor 28 20 Amp __ Power Outlet Green Yellow 36 Spare 29 20 Amp Front Control Module 37 Spare Yellow FCM 4 Wipers 38 20 Amp Spare 30 Spare Blue ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 385 Cavity cn Lond Description Cavity m piis Description 39 30 Amp Starter Solenoid 47 Spare Pink 48 20 Amp Sunroof Sound Box 40 40 Amp Ignition Run Feeds Blue Green 49 30 Amp Trailer Tow B 41 30 Amp Wiper Motor Pink Pink 50 40 Amp Anti Lock Brake Sys 42 25 Amp Front Control Module Green tem ABS Module Natural FCM 5 T Case Pump 43 10 Amp Lt Park Lamps 51 40 Amp Park L
253. lace or adjust as required Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Heater Defroster Ducts Inspect the heater defroster ducts for proper operation Check for proper airflow through all defroster ducts If there is any question regarding the operation of your heater defroster ducts have the system checked by an authorized dealer Seat Belts Inspect the seat belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after an accident if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc or if the front airbags have deployed If there is any question regarding seat belt or retractor condition re place the seat belt Airbag Warning Light The airbag warning light should come on and remain on for six to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not lit during starting see your authorized dealer If the light stays on flickers or comes on while driving have the system checked by an authorized dealer If there is a problem with the airbag warning light the seat belt light will flash ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine tires for tread wear or uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread Inspect for trea
254. leave a number on a pager You can also send stored UConnect phonebook entries as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager entries To use this feature dial the number you wish to call and then press the Voice Recognition button and say Send The system will prompt you to enter the name or number and say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send The UConnect system will then send the corresponding phone number associated with the phonebook entry as tones over the phone NOTE e You may not hear all of the tones due to cellular phone network configurations this is normal e Some paging and voice mail systems have system time out settings that are too short and may not allow the use of this feature Barge In Overriding Prompts The Voice Recognition button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice recognition command immediately For example if a prompt is asking Would you like to pair a phone clear a you could press the Voice Recognition button and say Pair a Phone to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt Turning Confirmation Prompts On Off Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system from confirming your choices e g the UConnect sys tem will not repeat a phone number before you dial it e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Confirmations
255. ll control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211 Push the rotary Tune Scroll control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the Tune Scroll control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary Tune Scroll control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the Tune Scroll control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary Tune Scroll control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the Tune Scroll control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary Tune Scroll control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the Tune Scroll control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following format types Program Type ag a No program type or un EU Med Wong Adult Hits Adlt Hit Classical Classicl Classic Rock Cls Rock College College Country Country Foreign Language Language Information Inform Jazz Jazz 212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT P
256. llow the user to choose the default startup DVD menu language effective only if language supported by disc If you want to select a language not listed then scroll down and select other ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187 Enter the four digit country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select Audio Language If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose a default audio language effective only if the language is supported by the disc You can select a language not listed by scrolling down and selecting other Enter the country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select Subtitle Language If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose a default subtitle language effective only if the language is supported by the disc You can select a language not listed by scrolling down and selecting other Enter the country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select Subtitles If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose between subtitle Off or On Audio DRC If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to limit maximum audio dynamic range The default is set to High and under this setting dialogues will play at 11 db higher than if the mm setting is Normal Aspect Ratio If Equipped Select
257. mation For example your vehicle has a recommended cold parked for more than three hours placard pressure of 33 psi 227 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi 193 kPa a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 24 psi 165 kPa This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn on the TPMS lamp Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi 193 kPa but the TPMS lamp will still be ON In this situation the TPMS lamp will turn off only after the tires have been inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value 204 STARTING AND OPERATING ME CAUTION NOTE e The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care e The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor dam age Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the tire pressure moni toring sensor
258. ms Inc System VES If Equipped Refer to separate Video Entertainment System VES Guide 196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se AM FM CD DVD MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM RADIO RER REN IF EQUIPPED NOTE The sales code is located on the lower right side of the unit s faceplate The REN and RER Multimedia systems contain a radio CD DVD player USB port a 20 gigabyte hard drive HDD and a JukeBox virtual CD changer Sirius Satellite Radio is optional The 6 5 in 16 5 cm touch screen allows for easy menu selection The RER radio also contains a Global Positioning System GPS based Navigation system Refer to your Multimedia system REN or Navigation RER user s manual for detailed operating instructions Operating Instructions Voice Recognition System VR If Equipped For the radio refer to Voice Recognition System VR in Section 3 Operating Instructions Hands Free Communication UConnect If Equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 Clock Setting Procedure Global Positioning System GPS RER only The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellite The satellite clock is Greenwich Mean Time GMT This is the worldwide standard for time This makes the system s clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone and daylight savings information is set To Manually Set the Clock
259. n Slide the wheel retainer through the center of the wheel and position it properly across the wheel opening For convenience in checking the spare tire inflation stow with the valve stem toward the rear of the vehicle Rotate the winch mechanism until the wheel is drawn into place against the underside of the vehicle Continue to rotate until you feel the winch mechanism slip or click three times It cannot be overtightened Push against the tire several times to be sure it is firmly in place NOTE To Stow the Flat or Spare Wheel retainer does not fit through the center of the aluminum wheel The tire must be stored in a safe manner in the bed of the truck JUMP STARTING WARNING e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution do not allow battery fluid to contact eyes skin or cloth ing Don t lean over battery when attaching clamps or allow the clamps to touch each other If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the contami nated area immediately with large quantities of water A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flam mable and explosive Keep flame or spark away from the vent holes Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output that exceeds 12 Volts Check the Battery Test Indicator if equipped If a light or bright colored dot is visible in the indicator DO NOT jump start the battery 344 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M WARNING Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as t
260. n Progress After the second call 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M has established press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the PHONE button Only the active call s will be terminated and if there is a call on hold it will become the new active call If the active call is terminated by the far end a call on hold may not become active automatically This is cell phone dependent To bring the call back from hold press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a single beep Redial e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Redial e The UConnect system will call the last number that was dialed from your cellular phone NOTE This may not be the last number dialed from the UConnect system Call Continuation Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the UConnect system after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to OFF Call continuation functionality avail able on the vehicle can be any one of three types e After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the UConnect system either until the call ends or until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call on the UConnect system and transfer of the call to the mobile phone e After the ignition key
261. n and service should also be done anytime a malfunction is suspected NOTE Maintenance replacement or repair of the emis sions control devices and systems on your vehicle may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any automotive part that has been certified pursuant to U S EPA or in the State of Califor nia California Air Resources Board regulations MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance The Change Oil message will flash in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime will sound indicat ing that an oil change is necessary Based on engine operation conditions the oil change indicator message will illuminate this means that service is required for your vehicle Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 500 miles 805 km NOTE e The oil change indicator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change Change your vehicle s oil if it has been six months since your last oil change even if the oil change indicator message is NOT illuminated ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 401 e Change your engine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off road for an extended period of time e Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or 6 months whichever comes first Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicat
262. n with the corresponding number 1 6 where the CD is being loaded The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT DISC After the radio displays INSERT DISC insert the CD into the player Radio display will show LOADING DISC when the disc is loading and READING DISC when the radio is reading the disc CAUTION This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism 190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Eject Button Ejecting Compact Disc s Press the EJECT button and the pushbutton amp with the corresponding number 1 6 where the 7 CD was loaded and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal Radio display will show EJECTING DISC when the disc is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc Press and hold the EJECT button for five seconds and all CDs will be ejected from the radio The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF SEEK Button CD MODE Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow you to scroll through the tracks faster in CD MP3 MWA modes SCAN Button CD MODE Press the SCAN button to scan through each trac
263. nd time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button 184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five 16 Digit Character seconds will allow the program format type to be se Program Type Display lected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Jazz Jazz Music Type information News News Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following Nostalgia Nostalga format types Oldies Oldies Piogram Type 16 Digit Character Feroenaly Persnlty Display Public Public No program type or un Nowe Rhythm and
264. ndicator flashes at a faster rate than normal check for a defective bulb If either indicator fails to light up when the lever is moved check for a defective fuse or turn signal LED A single chime is activated when the left right turn signal is left on with the vehicle speed greater than 15 mph 24 km h for more than one mile 4 Low Fuel Warning Light The low fuel warning light will illuminate when the fuel gauge reads 1 8 of a tank or less There is a pointer on the side of this symbol that indicates the side that your fuel filler door is located 5 High Beam Indicator E The high beam indicator will illuminate if the 777 headlights are on high beam 6 Seat Belt Reminder Light The seat belt reminder light will illuminate for several seconds after the ignition is turned ON as a reminder to buckle up This light will remain on as long as the seat belt remains unbuckled If this light flashes it indicates a fault in the seat belt system Have the system checked by an authorized dealer 7 Engine Temperature Warning Light E This light warns of an overheated engine condi ee tion As temperatures rise and the gauge ap proaches H Hot this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a set UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169 threshold Further overheating will cause the tempera ture gauge to pass H Hot the indicator will continu ously flash and a continuous chime will occur until th
265. ndicators under Tires General Information in Section 5 Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1 000 Ibs 454 kg and required for trailers in excess of 2 000 Ibs 907 kg 320 STARTING AND OPERATING M CAUTION If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 Ibs 454 kg loaded it should have its own brakes and they should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances WARNING Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s hy draulic brake lines It can overload your brake sys tem and cause it to fail You might not have brakes when you need them and could have an accident Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis tance When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you Failure to do so could result in an accident Towing Requirements Trailer Lights and Wiring Whenever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety The Trailer Tow Package may include a 4 and 7 pin wiring harness Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector NOTE Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle s wiring harness The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector Refer to the following illustrations rts
266. ndle counterclockwise until the spare tire is on the ground with enough cable slack to allow you to pull it out from under the vehicle When the spare is clear tilt the retainer at the end of the cable and pull it through the center of the wheel en WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 335 Steps for Removing the Spare Tire Remove the jack from the stowage compartment using the supplied finger assist tool Remove the finger assist tool from jack and set aside until jack is stowed Assemble the jack tools Locate the tire carrier access hole on the rear bumper Place assembled jack tool extension rod into the access hole in the direction of the arrow on the bumper trim Rotate the tool counterclockwise to release and lower the spare tire to the ground so that it can be pulled from under the vehicle Rotate clockwise to stow the spare tire Inserting Lug Wrench and Extension 336 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 8148c28b Turning Lug Wrench and Extension It is recommended that you stow the flat or spare to avoid tangling the loose cable 8148c283 Spare Tire Stowage Location NOTE The winch mechanism is designed for use with the jack extension tube only Use of an air wrench or other power tools is not recommended and can damage the winch ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 337 Tire Changing Procedure WARNING Getting under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You could
267. ne Change Engine Oil Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for proper maintenance intervals Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API certified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade SAE 5W 20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy 358 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your vehicle For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compart ment in this section Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom mended oil quality requirements are met and the recom mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed Materials Added to Engine Oils The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad dition of any additives other than leak detec
268. ne select list phones send mobile set up phone settings or phone mute set up mute off towing assistance new entry transfer call no UConnect Tutorial pager try again pair a phone voice training phone pairing pairing work phonebook phone book yes previous record again redial 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM VR IF EQUIPPED Voice Recognition System VR Operation This Voice Recognition System allows you to we control your AM FM radio satellite radio disc player and a memo recorder NOTE Take care to speak into the Voice Interface System as calmly and normally as possible The ability of the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice com mands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised voice level WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions and all attention should be kept on the roadway ahead Failure
269. ner cleaners or antistatic sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high NOTE If you experience difficulty in playing a particu lar disc it may be damaged ie scratched reflective coating removed a hair moisture or dew on the disc oversized or have theft protection encoding Try a known good disc before considering disc player service RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES Under certain conditions the cellular phone being ON in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the cellular phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during cellular phone operation CLIMATE CONTROLS The controls for the heating ventilation and air condi tioning system in this vehicle consist of a series of rotary knobs These comfort controls can be set to obtain desired interior conditions ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229 Air Conditioning And Heater 8159c710 Air Conditioning and Heater Control Air Conditioning And Heater Operation To turn on the air conditioning set the fan control at any speed and press the SNOWFLAKE button located at the right of the c
270. ng 000 240 Reverse Shifting lesse 245 Extreme Cold Weather Below 20 F Or Bl Automatic Transmission 245 i ee dl c ete di 240 Brake Transmission Interlock System 246 PEA me Ralls OUI ean sath at a Automatic Transmission 246 GUECEDIMUE 2 ee ea Aner A ae ll Four Wheel Drive Operation 251 H Engine Block Heater If Equipped 241 236 STARTING AND OPERATING ME NV233 243 GII Transfer Case Operating Information Precautions 251 Shifting Procedure NV233 243 Transfer Case sse pq p Sonny sar a ce nas 255 NV 244 Generation II Transfer Case Operating Information Precautions 257 Shifting Procedure NV 244 Generation II Trarisfer Case ceu ge RR Ex oa ees a 261 Bi Limited Slip Rear Axle Differential If Equipped cette Ra ER ERRLIEAE ELA 262 Bi Driving On Slippery Surfaces 263 Bi Driving Through Water 000 264 Flowing Rising Water 264 Shallow Standing Water 264 E Power Steering cese CR ERA Ea RR 266 Power Steering Fluid Check lll Parking Brake a Brake System 222r e Rear Wheel Anti Lock Brake System ABS If Equipped 02 20 4265 n Four Wheel Anti Lock Brake System ABS H Tire Safety Information Tire Markings ia uo br din Re era Tire
271. ng A Stuck The limited use spare tires are for emergency use Vehicle in Section 6 only Installation of this limited use spare tire affects WARNING vehicle handling With this tire DO NOT drive more Bane pR ABU eauh Keep intiated 40 te cota Ere Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure some inflation pressure listed on either your tire placard or limited use spare tire and wheel assembly Replace or repair the original tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control one DO NOT spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed 286 STARTING AND OPERATING Tread Wear Indicators Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced 1 Worn Tire 2 New Tire These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1 16 in 2 mm When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this point Life of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors includin
272. ng the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes Operation Instructions CD MODE For CD And MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the disc number the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203 CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism RES is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded Dual media disc types one side is a
273. ngine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended Maintenance Free Battery The top of the maintenance free battery is permanently sealed You will never have to add water nor is periodic maintenance required WARNING e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area imme diately with large amounts of water Continued 360 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Continued CAUTION e Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep e It is essential when replacing the cables on the flame or sparks away from the battery Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 volts Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked 4 positive and negative and are identified on the battery case If a fast charger is used wh
274. ning and closing switch on the passenger doors for passenger window control The windows will operate when the ignition switch is turned to the ON or ACC position and for ten minutes after the ignition is turned OFF or the driver s door is opened Power Window Switch en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 WARNING Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seri ously or fatally injured Don t leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Auto Down Driver s Side Only The driver s window switch has an Auto Down feature Push the window switch past the first detent release and the window will go down automatically To cancel the Auto Down movement operate the switch in either the up or down direction and release the switch Window Lockout Switch The Window Lockout Switch on the driver s door allows you to disable the window control on the other doors To disable the window controls on the other doors press the Window Lockout button To enable the window controls press the Window Lockout button a second time Power Window Lockout Switch Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STA
275. o RE VERSE Due to this feature a slow shift to REVERSE can be perceived as a high shift effort AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow ing precautions are not observed e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop e Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed Continued 246 STARTING AND OPERATING ME CAUTION Continued e Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal WARNING It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal Brake Transmission Interlock System This system prevents you from moving the shift lever out of PARK and into any gear unless the brake pedal is pressed This system is active only while the ignition switch is in the ON position Always depress the brake pedal first before moving the shift lever out of PARK Automatic Transmission The electronic PRNDL on the instrum
276. o activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play Notes on Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205 The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 file
277. o ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer s service manager first Most matters can be re solved with this process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer ship They want to know if you need assistance e If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the concern you may contact the manufacturer s customer center Any communication to the manufacturer s customer cen ter should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office e Authorized dealership name e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Vehicle delivery date and mileage Chrysler LLC Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 800 992 1997 Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 425 In Mexico contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D F In Mexico City 5081 4568 Outside Mexico City 1 800 505 1300 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its customer center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has
278. o lock the seat into position Using body pressure move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure the seat adjusters have latched 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Adjusting Lever WARNING Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust any seat only while the vehicle is parked Front Seats Manual Seat Recliners The front seats are equipped with recliners The reclining mechanism is operated by a lever located on the right side of the passenger s seat and the left side of the driver s seat To recline lean forward slightly before lifting the lever then push back to the desired position and release the lever Lean forward and lift the lever to return the seatback to its normal position Using body pressure lean forward and rearward on the seat to be sure the seatback is locked es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 WARNING Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked Manual Lumbar Support Adjustment If Equipped The manual lumbar support rotary control adjustment is located on the left side of the driver s seat
279. ob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the On Volume control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it TIME Button Press the TIME button and the time of day will display In AM or FM mode pressing the TIME button will switch between the time and frequency displays Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune Scroll control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side Tune Scroll control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune Scroll control knob Press the Tune Scroll control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button For ve
280. of 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189 Operation Instructions DISC MODE for CD and MP3 WMA Audio Play DVD VIDEO The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by geographic region These region codes must match in order for the disc to play If the region code for the DVD disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD player it will not play the disc Customers may take their vehicle to an authorized dealer to change the region code of the player a maximum of five times CAUTION The radio may shut down during extremely hot conditions When this occurs the radio will indicate Disc Hot and shut off until a safe temperature is reached This shutdown is necessary to protect the optics of the DVD player and other radio internal components NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio LOAD Button Loading Compact Disc s Press the LOAD button and the pushbutto
281. oil filter 1 Rotate tires 78 000 Miles 130 000 km or 84 000 Miles 140 000 km or 84 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires 1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary l Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 410 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ME 90 000 Miles 150 000 km or 90 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter 1 Replace the spark plugs 3 7L engines Q Replace the top row of spark plugs 4 7L engines 1 Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary 1 Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if you are using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Inspect the transfer case fluid L M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 411 96 000 Miles 160 000
282. ole This is where the compass sensor is located Manual Compass Calibration NOTE To ensure proper compass calibration make sure the compass variance is properly set before manu ally calibrating the compass If the compass appears erratic and the CAL symbol does not appear you must manually put the compass into the Calibration mode To Put Into a Calibration Mode Turn the ignition ON and set the display to Compass Temperature Press and hold the RESET button to change the display between VAR compass variance and CAL compass calibration modes When the CAL sym bol is displayed complete one 360 degree turn in an area free from large metal objects or power lines The CAL symbol will turn off and the compass will function normally Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic North and geographic North In some areas of the country the difference between magnetic and geographic North is great enough to cause the compass to give false readings If this occurs the compass variance must be set according to the Compass Variance Map 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Compass Variance Map To set the variance Turn the ignition ON and set the display to Compass Temperature Press and hold the RESET button approximately five seconds The last vari ance zone number will be displayed Press the STEP button to select the new variance zone and press the RESET button to resume normal opera
283. omatic transmission into NEUTRAL or de press clutch on manual transmission 6 Using the point of a ballpoint pen or similar object depress the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL button for 4 seconds 81977fda 7 After shift is completed and the NEUTRAL light comes on release the NEUTRAL button 8 Start engine 326 STARTING AND OPERATING M 9 Shift automatic transmission into REVERSE 10 Release brake pedal for five seconds and ensure that there is no vehicle movement 11 Repeat steps 9 and 10 with the transmission in DRIVE 12 Shut engine OFF and place ignition key to the unlocked OFF position 13 Shift automatic transmission into PARK Shift manual transmissions into 4th gear 14 Attach vehicle to tow vehicle with tow bar 15 Disconnect the negative battery cable NOTE e Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met prior to depressing the NEUTRAL selection button and must continue to be met until the 4 seconds elapse and the shift has been completed If any of these requirements with the exception of 3 Key ON are not met prior to depressing the NEUTRAL button or are no longer met during the 4 second timer then the NEUTRAL indicator light will flash continuously until all requirements are met or until the NEUTRAL button is released The ignition key must be ON for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable If the key in not ON the shift will not take place
284. on if equipped and supported by your phone UConnect automatically downloads mobile phone s phonebook Phonebook Download Automatic Phonebook transfer from Mobile phone If equipped and specifically supported by your phone UConnect automatically downloads names text names and number entries from the mobile phone s phonebook Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book Access Profile may support this feature See UConnect website for supported phones e To call a name from downloaded or UConnect Phonebook follow the procedure in Call by Saying a Name section Automatic download and update if supported begins as soon as the phone Bluetooth wireless connection is made to the UConnect For example after you start the vehicle Maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down loaded and updated every time a phone is connected to the UConnect Depending on the maximum number of entries down loaded there may be a short delay before the latest downloaded names can be used Until then if avail able previous downloaded phonebook is available for use Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile phone is accessible Only the Mobile phone s phonebook is downloaded SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phone book es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89 e This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or deleted on the UConnect These can only be edited on the mobile phone
285. on after shifting the transmission into gear may seem sluggish This is due to the fluid partially draining from the torque converter into the transmission This condition is normal and will not en STARTING AND OPERATING 251 cause damage to the transmission The torque converter will refill within five seconds of shifting from PARK into any other gear position FOUR WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION NV233 243 GII Transfer Case Operating Information Precautions The NV233 243 is an electric shift transfer case and is operated by the 4WD Control Switch Transfer Case Switch which is located on the instrument panel The NV233 243 transfer case provides four mode posi tions 2 rear wheel drive high range 4 wheel drive high range 4 wheel drive low range and NEUTRAL The NV233 243 transfer case is designed to be driven in the 2 wheel drive position 2WD for normal street and highway conditions dry hard surfaced roads When additional traction is required the transfer case 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions can be used to lock the front and rear driveshafts together and force the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed This is accomplished by rotating the 4WD Control Switch to the desired position Refer to Shifting Procedure in this section The 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions are designed for loose or slippery road surfaces only Driving in the 2WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions on dry hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire w
286. on key If the steering wheel is moved no more than 1 2 turn in either direction and the key is not in the ignition switch the steering wheel will lock If You Wish To Manually Lock The Steering Wheel With the engine running turn the steering wheel upside down turn off the engine and remove the key Turn the steering wheel slightly in either direction until the lock engages To Release The Steering Wheel Lock Insert the key in the ignition switch and start the engine If the key is difficult to turn move the wheel slightly to the right or left to disengage the lock NOTE If you turned the wheel to the right to engage the lock you must turn the wheel slightly to the right to disengage it If you turned the wheel to the left to engage the lock turn the wheel slightly to the left to disengage it Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock System This system prevents the key from being removed unless the shift lever is in PARK It also prevents shifting out of PARK unless the key is in the ACC or ON position and the brake pedal is pressed 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se SENTRY KEY IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The Sentry Key prevents unauthorized vehicle opera tion by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked The system uses ignition keys that have an embedded electronic chip tran
287. on matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly 1 This spare tire does not have a tire pressure monitor ing sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the tire pressure in the spare tire 2 If you install the full size spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Lamp will still turn ON due to the low tire 3 However after driving the vehicle for up to 10 min utes above 15 mph 25 km h the TPM Telltale Lamp will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 4 For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the full size spare tire the TPMS will update automatically and the TPM Telltale Lamp will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information General Information This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference recei
288. ontrol panel Conditioned air will be di rected through the outlets selected by the mode control A light at the top of the SNOWFLAKE button shows that the air conditioning is on Press the button a second time to turn the air conditioning off Slight changes in engine speed or power may be noticed when the air conditioning compressor is on This is a normal occurrence as the compressor will cycle on and off to maintain comfort and increase fuel economy The Mode Control at the right of the 3i S control panel can be set in any of the following positions 8159c7fa Mode Control NOTE To improve your selection choices the system allows you to operate at intermediate positions between the major modes These intermediate positions are iden tified by the small dots 230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Recirculation Modes Panel or Bi Level e Select the recirculation modes when the outside air contains dust odors high humidity or if rapid cooling is desired This feature allows for recir culation of interior air only Air flows either through the panel outlets or both the panel and floor outlets to gether depending on which recirculation mode is selected Panel Fresh Air Modes Outside air flows through the outlets located in the instrument panel Bi Level v Outside air flows through the outlets located in the instrument panel and at the floor Cen E 811b550b Floor Outside air flows prim
289. or message after completing the scheduled oil change If this scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under Oil Change Required in Use Factory Settings of the EVIC section in this manual or under Odometer Trip Odometer in the Instrument Cluster Descriptions section of this manual At Each Stop for Fuel e Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil level Once a Month while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level reading Add oil only when the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals as required Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir brake master cylinder power steering and transmission and add as needed M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Check all lights and other electrical items for correct operation M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 402 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES MEM At Each Oil Change e Change the engine oil filter e Inspect the brake hoses and lines e Check the manual transmission fluid level CAUTION Failure to perform the required maintenance items may
290. orted Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217 exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc o
291. ot detrimental to the vehicle or occupants Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h or completely stopped USE EITHER OF THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURES Preferred Procedure 1 With engine RUNNING slow vehicle to 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h 2 Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL depress clutch on manual transmissions 3 While still rolling rotate the transfer case control switch to the desired position 4 After the desired position indicator light is ON not flashing shift transmission back into gear release clutch on manual transmissions Alternate Procedure 1 Bring the vehicle to complete stop 2 With the key ON and the engine either OFF or RUNNING shift the transmission into NEUTRAL de press clutch on manual transmissions 3 Rotate the transfer case control switch to the desired position ee STARTING AND OPERATING 257 4 After the desired position indicator light is ON not flashing shift transmission back into gear release clutch on manual transmissions NOTE If steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alternate Procedure are not satisfied prior to attempting the shift or if they no longer are being met while the shift attempt is in process then the indicator light will flash and the current transfer case position will be maintained To retry the selection turn the control knob back to the current position wait five seconds and retry shift NOTE The ignition
292. ould speak to a person sitting a few feet meters away from you e Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a voice recognition period e Performance is maximized under e low to medium blower setting es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 e low to medium vehicle speed e Phonebook Downloaded and UConnect Local name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are not e low road noise sin lar smodhivoad sures e You can say O letter O for 0 zero 800 must be fully closed windows spoken eight zero zero Em dry weather condition e Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported e Even though the system is designed for users speaking in North American English French and Spanish ac cents the system may not always work for some e In a convertible vehicle system performance may be S i ith th ible top down e When navigating through an automated system such FOHIESOHICS el IE COE gown as voice mail or when sending a page at the end of Far End Audio Performance speaking the digit string make sure to say Send e Audio quality is maximized under e Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is s owi medun blower sain not in motion is recommended amp ae e low to medium vehicle speed e It is not recommended to store similar sounding SUNRISE eeu P names in the UConnect
293. ount or locate any aftermarket equipment on or behind the knee bolsters Continued E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 WARNING Continued e Itis dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system NOTE Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate Enhanced Accident Response System If the airbags deploy after an impact and the electrical system remains functional vehicles equipped with power door locks will unlock automatically In addition approximately five seconds after the vehicle has stopped moving the interior lights will light until the ignition switch is turned off Airbag Warning Light You will want to have the airbags ready to 9 inflate for your protection in an impact While the airbag system is designed to be mainte nance free if any of the following occurs have an authorized dealer service the system promptly e The Airbag Warning Light does not come on or flickers during the six to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first turned on e The light remains on or flickers after the six to eight second interval The light flickers or comes on and remains on while driving NOTE If the speedometer tachometer or any engine related gauges are not working the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC may also be disabled The airbags ma
294. our vehicle serviced promptly Contin ued operation of your vehicle with a severe The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel malfunction could cause the converter to overheat only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the resulting in possible damage to the converter and the catalyst as an emission control device vehicle Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is im portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 365 WARNING To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage e Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may indicate severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs the vehicle should be stopped the engine shut off and the vehicle allowed to cool Thereafter service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifications should be ob
295. ously or fatally injured Don t leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended Manual Transmission If Equipped When the steering wheel is in the LOCK position the steering and ignition systems are locked to provide antitheft protection for your vehicle It may be difficult to turn the key from the LOCK position when starting your vehicle Move the steering wheel left and right while turning the key until it turns easily To remove the key Ignition Release Button depress and hold the release button located between the 1 ACC 4 ON RUN ignition switch and the instrument panel Turn the igni 2 LOCK 5 START 3 OFF tion key to LOCK and remove the key ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 Locking Doors With The Key You can insert the key into the door lock cylinder with either side up To lock the driver s door turn the key rearward To unlock the driver s door turn the key forward For external door lock lubrication refer to Body Lubrication in Section 7 STEERING WHEEL LOCK IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with a passive steering wheel lock This lock prevents steering the vehicle with out the igniti
296. out Your UConnect System UConnect Tutorial To hear a brief tutorial of the system features press the PHONE button and say UConnect Tutorial Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the UConnect 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M system Voice Training feature may be used To enter this training mode follow one of the two following proce dures From outside the UConnect mode e g from radio mode e Press and hold the Voice Recognition button for five seconds until the session begins or e Press the Voice Recognition button and say the Setup Voice Training command Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the UConnect system For best results the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked with the engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched OFF This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only To restore the Voice Recognition system to factory default settings enter the Voice Training session via the above procedure and follow the prompts Voice Recognition VR e For best performance adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least in 1 cm gap between the overhead console if equipped and the mirror e Always wait for the beep before speaking e Speak normally without pausing just as you w
297. p of the view obtained on the inside mirror Outside Mirrors Folding Feature If Equipped Folding outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either forward or rearward to resist damage es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 81 Power Mirrors To adjust a mirror turn the control wand toward the left The power mirror controls are located on the driver s or right mirror positions indicated Tilt the control wand door trim panel in the direction you want the mirror to move When you are finished adjusting the mirror turn the control to the center position to prevent accidentally moving a mirror Power Mirror Switch Mirror Directions 82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in the right side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your right side mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the right side mirror HANDS FREE COMMUNICATION UConnect IF EQUIPPED NOTE The sales code RER and REU radios contain an integrated Hands Free Communication UConnect system Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for UConnect system operating instructions for these radios UConnect is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system UConnect allows you to dial a phone number
298. pen after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 KHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Specification Sampling Fre quency kHz Bit Rate kbps 320 256 224 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 48 44 1 32 218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M MPEG Sampling Fre Specification quency KHz Bit Rate kbps 160 128 144 MPEG 2 Audio 112 96 80 64 Layer 3 2 2209 16 Sp 46 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If th
299. pheric fallout industrial pollutants CAUTION Washing e Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder which will e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or a mild peratchy mictal and painted Bree car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with e Use of power washers exceeding 1 200 psi clear water 8 274 kPa can result in damage or removal of paint and decals e If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu lated on your vehicle use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove 378 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Special Care If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once a month It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors rocker panels be kept clear and open If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or similar cause which destroys the paint and protective coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos sible The cost of such repairs is considered the respon sibility of the owner If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed e If a lot of driving is done on grav
300. propriate use of each transfer case mode position refer to the following infor mation 4WD The 4 Wheel Drive High Range employs the inter axle differential This range allows front and rear wheels to rotate at different speeds on all road surfaces 4WD LOCK The 4 Wheel Drive Lock 4WD LOCK Range locks the transfer case inter axle differential forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed Additional traction for loose slippery road surfaces only 4WD LOW The 4 Wheel Drive Low 4WD LOW Range provides low speed 4 wheel drive It locks the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed This range provides additional traction and maximum pulling power for loose or slip pery road surfaces only Do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h N The NEUTRAL Range disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain NEUTRAL is used for flat towing behind another vehicle Refer to Recreational Towing in Section 5 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 261 Shifting Procedure NV 244 Generation II Transfer Case 8197509c NOTE The 4x4 system will not allow shifts between 4WD 4WD LOCK if the rear wheels are spinning no traction In this situation a position indicator light will flash and the original position indicator light will remain on At this time reduce speed and stop spinning the wheels to complete the shift There may be a delay up to 13 seconds fo
301. push the safety latch lever up while lifting the Lift the hood and the gas filled props will hold it open your hand It is located at the bottom center of To prevent possible damage do not slam the hood to Mie gru close it Use a firm downward push at the center front edge of the hood to ensure that both latches engage Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed with both latches engaged WARNING If the hood is not fully latched it could fly up when the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision Be sure all hood latches are fully latched before driving Secondary Latch Location ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 LIGHTS The headlight switch is located on the left side of the instrument panel next to the steering wheel 7 8196c9da Headlight Switch Location Interior Lights Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front doors are opened when the dimmer control rotating wheel on the right side of the switch is rotated to the second upward detent position or if equipped when the UNLOCK button is pressed on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter When a door is open and the interior lights are on rotating the dimmer control all the way down to the OFF detent will cause all the interior lights to go out This is also known as the Party mode because it allows the doors to stay open for extended periods of time without discharging the vehicle s battery T
302. r underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the Fall and Spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder Windshield Wiper Blades The rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield should be cleaned periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner This will remove accu mulations of salt or road film Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 363 Windshield Washers The fluid reservoir should be checked for fluid level at regular intervals When freezing weather is anticipated flush out the water in the reservoir by operating the system Fill the reservoir with windshield washer anti freeze not radiator antifreeze and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water To prevent freeze up of your windshield washer system in cold weather select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate
303. r WIndows ecse serrer CERA ER S 34 To Unlock The Doors sllssslsssn 22 Auto Down Driver s Side Only 35 To Lock The Doors ecs 29 RR 22 Window Lockout Switch ls 35 Using The Panic Alarm 24 Wind Buffeting 0 00 Ene 35 General Information 24 MM Occupant Restraints esos e 36 Programming Additional Transmitters 25 Lap Shoulder Belts 00 37 Battery Replacement 26 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage 42 ll Remote Starting System If Equipped 27 Automatic Locking Retractors ALR Mode B Door Locks 34 ut5 4u0s eh ohne a 29 EUEQUIDDEON dst breed sas apr elses ee 49 aia Doordocki cuis assorted 29 Center Lap Belts 43 IN PER NNI 29 Seat Belt Pretensioners sies 44 Child Protection Door Lock 32 Pier MM in ae ed ad MB Windows ex24ds5 0i 39 osi petir derin een 34 Seat Pelis And Pregnant Womed eco averse 45 Seat Belt Extender 000008 45 Driver And Right Front Passenger Supplemental Restraint System SRS Adbags oe a c beaded e eas 46 Event Data Recorder EDR 56 Child Restraint seess sence bd eee RIRs 58 ll Engine Break In Recommendations 70 gibt Tips os sce es HT PERO ees Exhaust System vie sche re Rea Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The VEHICLE 3 wate arent there acy
304. r attempt to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal partially engaged as this will cause abnormal wear on the clutch NOTE During cold weather you may experience in creased effort in shifting until the transmission fluid warms up This is normal ee STARTING AND OPERATING 243 Shifting Recommended Vehicle Shift Speeds To utilize your manual transmission efficiently for both 1 3 5 fuel economy and performance it should be upshifted as listed in recommended shift speed chart Shift at the vehicle speeds listed for acceleration When heavily loaded or pulling a trailer these recommended up shift speeds may not apply Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH KM H En Accel Axle eration 1to02 2to3 3to4 4to5 5to6 i Rate 15 24 34 47 56 21 ACCEL 2 4 6 R steers azz Oe Xen G9 79 CO i 3 55 CRUISE 10 19 27 37 41 Shift Pattern 16 31 44 60 66 Fully depress the clutch pedal before shifting gears As you release the clutch pedal lightly depress the accelera tor pedal You should always use 1st gear when starting from a standing position 244 STARTING AND OPERATING Se CAUTION When descending a hill be very careful to downshift Downshifting Moving from a high gear down to a lower gear is recommended to preserve brakes when driving down steep hills In addition downshifting at the right time provides better acceleration when you des
305. r case position have not been met the transfer case will not shift The indicator light will flash and the current transfer case position will be maintained To retry the selection turn the control knob back to the current position wait five seconds and retry the shift LIMITED SLIP REAR AXLE DIFFERENTIAL IF EQUIPPED The limited slip differential provides additional traction on snow ice mud sand and gravel It improves traction when there is a difference between the characteristics of the surface under the right and left rear wheels During normal driving and cornering the limited slip unit is similar to a conventional differential But on a slippery surface the differential delivers more of the driving effort to the wheel having the better traction ee STARTING AND OPERATING 263 WARNING On vehicles equipped with a limited slip differen tial never run the engine with one rear wheel off the ground The vehicle may drive through the rear wheel remaining on the ground and cause you to lose control of the vehicle Care should be taken to avoid sudden accelerations when both rear wheels are on a slippery surface This could cause both rear wheels to spin and allow the vehicle to slide sideways on the crowned surface of a road or in a turn DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES When driving on wet or slushy roads it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface This is known as hydroplaning
306. r the shift to complete after the wheels have stopped spinning NOTE Delayed shifting out of the 4WD LOCK position may be experienced due to uneven tire wear low tire pressure or excessive loading NOTE When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW some gear noise may be heard This noise is normal and is not detrimental to the vehicle or occupants Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h or completely stopped USE EITHER OF THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURES Preferred Procedure 1 With the engine running slow vehicle to 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h 2 Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL 262 STARTING AND OPERATING ME 3 While still rolling rotate the transfer case control switch to the desired position 4 After the position indicator light has stopped flashing shift the transmission back into gear Alternate Procedure 1 Bring the vehicle to a complete stop 2 With the key ON and the engine either OFF or running shift the transmission into NEUTRAL 3 Rotate the transfer case control switch to the desired position 4 After the position indicator light has stopped flashing shift the transmission back into gear NOTE e The ignition key must be ON for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable If the key is not ON then the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing If any of the requirements to select a new transfe
307. r to reactivate this feature repeat the above steps Using The Panic Alarm To activate the Panic mode while the ignition is OFF press and release the PANIC button on the RKE trans mitter once When the Panic mode is activated the interior lights will illuminate the headlights and parking lights will flash and the horn will sound To cancel the Panic mode press and release the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter a second time Panic mode will automatically cancel after three minutes or if the vehicle is started or exceeds 15 mph 24 km h During the Panic Mode the door locks and RKE systems will function normally Panic mode will not disarm the Ve hicle Security Alarm System on vehicles so equipped General Information This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with RS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment If your RKE Transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 Weak batteries in the RKE transmitter The expected life of batteries is five years 2 Closene
308. revent the lost key from starting your vehicle The remaining keys must then be reprogrammed All vehicle keys must be taken to an authorized dealer at the time of service to be reprogrammed ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The Vehicle Security Alarm system monitors the vehicle doors and ignition for unauthorized operation When the Vehicle Security Alarm system is activated it will provide both audible and visible signals The horn will sound repeatedly for the three minutes and the headlights and Vehicle Security Light will flash for an additional 15 min utes The engine will not run until the Vehicle Security Alarm system is disarmed To Set the Alarm The Vehicle Security Alarm will set when you use the power door locks or use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to lock the doors After all the doors are locked and closed the Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash rapidly for approximately 15 seconds to signal that the Vehicle Security Alarm system is arming After the Vehicle Security Alarm is set the Vehicle Security Light will flash at a slower rate to indicate that the system is armed NOTE If the Vehicle Security Light stays on continu ously during vehicle operation have the Vehicle Security Alarm system checked by an authorized dealer To Disarm the System Use the RKE transmitter to unlock the door If something has triggere
309. ries were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road charac teristics and climate Traction Grades The Traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C These grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 423 WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics Temperature Grades The temperature grades are A the highest B
310. rily in each gear position ending with the lever in PARK 5 Remove the dipstick wipe it clean and reinsert it until seated 6 Remove the dipstick again and note the fluid level on both sides The fluid level should be between the HOT upper reference holes on the dipstick at normal operat ing temperature Verify that solid coating of oil is seen on both sides of the dipstick If the fluid is low add as required into the dipstick tube Do not overfill After adding any quantity of oil through the oil fill tube wait a minimum of two minutes for the oil to fully drain into the transmission before rechecking the fluid level NOTE If it is necessary to check the transmission below the operating temperature the fluid level should be between the two COLD lower holes on the dipstick with the fluid at approximately 70 F 21 C room temperature If the fluid level is correctly established at room temperature it should be between the HOT upper reference holes when the transmission reaches 180 F 82 C Remember it is best to check the level at the normal operating temperature 374 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se CAUTION Be aware that if the fluid temperature is below 50 F 10 C it may not register on the dipstick Do not add fluid until the temperature is elevated enough to produce an accurate reading 7 Check for leaks Release parking brake To prevent dirt and water from entering the transmission after c
311. rity level between 1 and 7 with 1 being the highest priority You can pair up to seven cellular phones to your UConnect system However at any given time only one cellular phone can be in use connected to your UConnect system The priority allows the UConnect system to know which cellular phone to use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the same time For example if priority 3 and priority 5 phones are present in the vehicle the UConnect system will use the priority 3 cellular phone when you make a call You can select to use a lower priority cellular phone at any time refer to Advanced Phone Connectivity in this section Dial by Saying a Number Press the PHONE button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Dial The system will prompt you to say the number you want to call For example you can say 234 567 8901 The UConnect system will confirm the phone num ber and then dial The number will appear in the display of certain radios Call by Saying a Name Press the PHONE button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Call The system will prompt you to say the name of the person you want to call After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the person you want to call For example you can say John Doe where John Doe is a previ ously stored name entry in the UConnect phonebook or downloaded phonebook To learn ho
312. rted If the vehicle is not ready for emissions testing the light will come on when the ignition is first turned ON and remain on for 15 seconds then blink for 5 seconds and remain on until the vehicle is started If the bulb does not come on during starting have the condition investigated promptly 176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M If this light comes on and remains on while driving it suggests a potential engine control problem and the need for system service Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause damage to the engine control system It also could affect fuel economy and drivability If the MIL is flashing severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required 22 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light If Equipped Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and d inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitor
313. s Then pull out on the cleat and slide it to the detent nearest the desired location Make sure the cleat is seated in the detent and tighten the nut 1 Utility Rail Cleat 2 Cleat Retainer Nut 3 Utility Rail Detent 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To remove the cleats from the utility rail remove the end cap by pushing up on the locking tab located on the bottom of the end cap Slide the cleat off the end of the rail Utility Rail End Cap REAR WINDOW FEATURES Rear Window Defroster If Equipped CAUTION Use care when washing the inside of the rear window to prevent damage to heating elements Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Also keep all objects a safe distance from the window to prevent damaging the heating elements Ese A pushbutton type switch is located on the right side of the Air Conditioning and Heater Control below the A C snowflake button Pressing the switch will turn on the Rear Window Defroster A light above the Rear Window Defroster symbol will illuminate to indi cate the Rear Window Defroster is on Pushing the button a second time will turn the Rear Window Defroster off es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 prior to the time out The Rear Window Defroster will turn off automatically after 15 minutes from the first activation and 10 minutes after the second activation all within the
314. s but not longer than 10 seconds then press and hold the UNLOCK button A single chime will sound to indicate that this feature has changed 3 Release both buttons at the same time 4 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press ing the LOCK UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm System activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm System 5 If the desired programming was not achieved or to reactivate this feature repeat the above steps To Lock The Doors Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter to lock all doors If the ignition is OFF when the doors are locked the parking lights will flash on once and the horn will chirp once en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 Horn Chirp Programming The horn chirp feature is shipped from the assembly plant activated If desired this feature can be disabled by using the following procedure 1 Press and hold the LOCK button on the RKE trans mitter 2 After holding the LOCK button for four seconds also press the PANIC button within six seconds A single chime will sound to indicate that this feature has changed 3 Release both buttons at the same time 4 To reactivate this feature repeat the above
315. s exceeding 50 folders will result in this display e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit 206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rate MPEG Specifi cation Sampling Fre quency kHz Bit Rate kbps MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 48 44 1 32 320 256 224 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 MPEG 2 Audio Layer 3
316. s connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when ignition is OFF SALES CODE RES RSC AM FM STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER MP3 AUX JACK AND SIRIUS RADIO NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of your radio faceplate 208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL RES RSC Radio Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the On Volume control knob to turn on the radio Push the On Volume control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the On Volume control knob to the right increases the vol ume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down Th
317. same ignition cycle To prevent excessive battery drain use the rear defroster only when the engine is running Sliding Rear Window If Equipped A locking device in the center of the window helps to prevent entry from the rear of the vehicle Squeeze the lock to release the window Sliding Rear Window Latch SLIDE IN CAMPERS Camper Applications Certain truck models are not recommended for slide in campers To determine if your vehicle is excluded please refer to the Consumer Information Truck Camper Load ing document located in your Owner s Manual packet or 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M available from your authorized dealer For safety reasons follow all instructions on this important document General Information The Manufacturer s Warranty does not apply to body modifications and special equipment such as a camper unit heaters stoves refrigerators etc supplied by manufacturers other than Chrysler LLC For warranty coverage and service on these items contact the appli cable manufacturer To mount a camper unit with an overhang the tailgate can be removed Unlatch the tailgate and remove the support cables from the retainer pins Raise the right side of the tailgate until the lower right side pivot clears the hanger bracket Then slide the tailgate to the right to remove Carbon Monoxide Warning Vehicles Equipped With A Cap or Slide In Campers To avoid inhaling carbon monoxide whic
318. setting 1 Turn on the multimedia system 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Show Time if Radio is Off 198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Touch the screen where the words Show Time if Radio is Off are displayed to change the current setting Changing the Time Zone 1 Turn on the multimedia system 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 Touch the screen where the words Set Time Zone are displayed The time zone selection menu will appear on the screen 4 Select a time zone by touching the screen where your selection appears If you do not see a time zone that you want to select touch the screen where the word Page is displayed to view additional time zones in the menu 5 Touch the screen where the word Save is displayed SALES CODE RES AM FM STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER MP3 AUX JACK NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of your radio faceplate RES Radio ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199 Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the On Volume control knob to turn on the radio Push the On Volume control kn
319. severely side to side which will cause loss of control of vehicle and trailer Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer accidents Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch ener Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle e The tongue weight of the trailer en STARTING AND OPERATING 317 CAUTION e Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles 805 km of vehicle operation Doing so may dam e The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle e The weight of the driver and all passengers NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional factory installed options or dealer installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle Refer to Tire and Loading Information Placard under Tire Safety Information in Section 5 Towing Requirements To promote proper break in of your new vehicle driv etrain components the following guidelines are recom mended age your vehicle e During the first 500 miles 805 km of trailer towing limit your speed to 50 mph 80 km h Perform the maintenance listed in the Maintenance Schedule Refer to Section 8 of this manual When towing a trailer never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings WARNING Improper towing can lead to an injury accident
320. sler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 415 M A pS Ru 144 000 Miles 240 000 km or 144 Months Maintenance Service 150 000 Miles 250 000 km or N Schedule 150 Months Maintenance T 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Service Schedule F T Rotate tires J Change the engine oil and engine oil A 1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the filter N engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary T Rotate tires t 1 Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary 1 Replace the engine air cleaner filter E O Inspect the CV joints 1 Replace the spark plugs 3 7L engines 11 Inspect the exhaust system Replace the top row of spark plugs S J Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if you are using your vehicle for police taxi 4 7L engines C fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Qi Inspect the transfer case fluid E 1 Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary D U L E S Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 416 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ME WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only that service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about
321. sponder to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation Therefore only keys that are pro grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle The system will shut the engine off in two seconds if someone uses an invalid key to try to start the engine NOTE A key that has not been programmed is also considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle During normal operation after turning on the ignition switch the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics In addition if the light begins to flash after the bulb check it indicates that someone used an invalid key to try to start the engine Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 sec onds it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics Should this occur have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible NOTE e The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not compat ible with some aftermarket remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection e Exxon Mobil Speedpass additional Sentry Keys or any other transponder equipped components on ee THINGS TO KNOW BEF
322. ss to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter military base and some mobile or CB radios Programming Additional Transmitters This vehicle is shipped from the assembly plant with two RKE transmitters programmed for this vehicle only A total of eight RKE transmitters can be programmed for your vehicle Additional RKE transmitters can be pro grammed to your vehicle through the use of currently programmed RKE transmitters NOTE When entering program mode using that cur rently programmed RKE transmitter all other pro grammed RKE transmitters will be erased and you will have to reprogram them for your vehicle Use the following procedure to program additional RKE transmitters if the vehicle is not equipped with a Sentry Key 1 Enter your vehicle and close all the doors 2 Fasten your seat belt Fastening the seat belt will cancel any chiming that may confuse you during this programming procedure 3 Place the key into the ignition 4 Turn the ignition to the ON position Do not start the engine 5 Press and hold the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M 6 After holding the UNLOCK button for four seconds also press the PANIC button within six seconds 7 When a single chime is heard release both buttons The chime is an indication that you have successfully entered program mode All RKE transmitters that are to be programmed mu
323. st be done so within 60 seconds of when the chime was heard 8 Using the RKE transmitter to be programmed press and hold both the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons simul taneously for two seconds and then release 9 Press and release the UNLOCK button A single chime will be heard 10 Repeat steps 8 and 9 to program up to six additional RKE transmitters 11 Turn the ignition to the OFF position 12 Your vehicle will remain in program mode up to 60 seconds from when the original chime was heard After 60 seconds all programmed RKE transmitters function normally NOTE If you do not have a programmed RKE trans mitter contact your authorized dealer for details Battery Replacement The recommended replacement battery is CR2032 NOTE Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate 1 If the RKE transmitter is equipped with a screw remove the screw With the RKE transmitter buttons facing down use a flat blade to pry the two halves of the RKE transmitter apart Make sure not to damage the elastomer seal during removal 7 Battery Access Door 2 Remove and replace the battery When replacing the battery match the sign on battery to the sign on the inside of the battery clip located on the back cover Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 81182072
324. stance To Empty DTE 138 To Set At A Desired Speed 133 Trip Odometer ODO lo Deactivate sss RR ASR Re as 133 Elapsed Time ET 00 To Resume Speed 0 000 133 C T Buttons a9 Rx wane Uu E wo nina 139 To Vary The Speed Setting 134 Global Reset 4 4 45 exces ex e xa 140 To Accelerate For Passing 134 Compass Temperature Display 140 H Overhead Console 25e n 135 Automatic Compass Calibration 140 Courtesy Reading Lights 136 Manual Compass Calibration 141 lll Compass Temperature Mini Trip Computer 136 To Put Into a Calibration Mode 141 US M Button see 137 Outside Temperature 0 142 Reset Button llle 137 78 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M ll Garage Door Opener If Equipped 142 Programming HomeLink 144 Gate Operator Canadian Programming 146 Using HomeLink 0 0 147 Reprogramming A Single HomeLink D ttOh ii ei iube EP eee E RE Read 147 SECUTI 1 35 0 aos etn ahah em etae qug vere tede 148 Troubleshooting Tips lessen 148 General Information 148 Bi Electrical Power Outlets 0 149 Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off Battery Fed Configuration 150 a Cupholdets viscid seg cix S
325. stays on or illuminates during driving it means that the 4WD system is not functioning properly and that service is required 26 Cruise Indicator The cruise indicator illuminates when the electronic speed control system is turned on ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179 27 Cargo Light The Cargo Light indicator will illuminate when the Cargo Light is activated by pressing the CARGO LIGHT button located on the headlight switch 28 TOW HAUL The TOW HAUL button is located at the end of the gear shift lever This light will illuminate when the TOW HAUL button has been selected 29 AWD LOW Indicator The 4WD Low indicator illuminates when the transfer case is in AWD LOW position 30 OdometerlTrip Odometer Button Press the ODOMETER TRIP ODOMETER button to toggle between the odometer and the trip odometer display Holding the button in resets the trip odometer reading ELECTRONIC DIGITAL CLOCK The clock and radio each use the display panel built into the radio A digital readout shows the frequency and or time in hours and minutes depending on your radio model whenever the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position When the ignition switch is in the OFF position or when the radio frequency is being displayed timekeeping is accurately maintained On the AM FM CD 6 disc radio the time button alternates the location of the time and frequency on the display On the AM FM CD single disc radio only one of t
326. steps 5 Test the horn chirp feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the ignition in the OFF position and the key removed NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm System 6 If the desired programming was not achieved or to reactivate this feature repeat the above steps Flash Lamps With Lock Programming 1 Press and hold the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter 2 After holding the UNLOCK button for four seconds also press the LOCK button within six seconds A single chime will sound to indicate that this feature has changed 3 Release both buttons at the same time 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee 4 Test the Flash Lamps With Lock feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the ignition in the OFF position and the key removed NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm System 5 If the desired programming was not achieved o
327. tain training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with vehicle components contain or emit chemicals the ownership experience You ll be pleased with their known to the State of California to cause cancer and sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related birth defects or other reproductive harm In addi concerns tion certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemi cals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm INDEX 428 INDEX ae Adding Puel siess sre tae a rb ae diues 306 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 359 Air Conditioner Maintenance 360 Air Conditioning seda cep rao REY wees 229 Air Conditioning Operating Tips 229 232 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 360 361 Air Conditioning System 229 360 Air tef 22223 ugue ur ea dea tied awe hs 359 Air Pressure Tires 00000 eee 281 289 Airbag esed oie ealed 24 3 Gas EIA rre 46 178 Altbag LIBht ug dapoi gosie angi 55 72 Alarms Pane 22d x due foe g i Aa X dep deeds 24 Alarm Security Alarm 19 170 Alarm System Security Alarm 19 Alignment and Balance 006 288 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 7 Antenna Satellite Radio 00005 222 Antifreeze Engine Coolant 367 396 Disposal i 2 4o ra ee
328. te that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE Mixing engine coolant antifreeze types will decrease the life of the engine coolant antifreeze and will require more frequent engine coolant antifreeze changes Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant antifreeze and to ensure that the engine coolant antifreeze will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery bottle The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 369 WARNING e The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre caution Never add engine coolant antifreeze when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or en gine damage may result Disposal of Used Engine Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal
329. te when the engine is started the transmission is out of the PARK position and the parking brake is released This provides a constant lights on condition until the ignition is turned OFF The lights illuminate at less than normal intensity If the parking brake is applied or the transmis sion is in the PARK position the Daytime Running Lights DRL will turn off Lights on Reminder If the headlights parking lights courtesy lights or cargo lights are left on after the ignition is turned OFF a chime will sound when the driver s door is opened Fog Lights If Equipped 40 The Fog Lights are turned on by placing the headlight rotary control in the parking light or headlight position and pushing on the headlight rotary control The fog lights will operate only when the parking lights are on or when the vehicle headlights are on low beam An indicator light located in the instrument cluster will illuminate when the fog lights are on The fog lights will turn off when the switch is pushed a second time also when the headlight switch is rotated to the off position or the high beam is selected Cargo Light If Equipped The cargo lights are turned on by pressing on the CARGO button The cargo lights will also turn on for es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 30 seconds when the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button is Turn Signals pressed as part of the illuminated entry feature To operate the turn signals move the mult
330. tem you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you In order to mute the UConnect system e Press the Voice Recognition button e Following the beep say Mute In order to un mute the UConnect system e Press the Voice Recognition button 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e Following the beep say Mute off Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone The UConnect system allows ongoing calls to be trans ferred from your cellular phone to the UConnect system without terminating the call To transfer an ongoing call from your UConnect paired cellular phone to the UConnect system or vice versa press the Voice Recog nition button and say Transfer Call Connect or Disconnect Link Between the UConnect System and Cellular Phone Your cellular phone can be paired with many different electronic devices but can only be actively connected with one electronic device at a time If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth connection between a UConnect paired cellular phone and the UConnect system follow the instructions de scribed in your cellular phone User s Manual List Paired Cellular Phone Names e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e When prompted say List Phones
331. th tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control e DO NOT use a tire wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus pension dimensions and performance characteris tics resulting in changes to steering handling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredict able handling and stress to steering and suspen CAUTION Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer sion components You could lose control and have readings an accident resulting in serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle NEVER use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity other than what was originally equipped e Fast tire wear on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure You could lose control and have an accident Continued Vehicle pull to right or left Alignment And Balance Poor suspension alignment may result in e Uneven tire wear such as feathering and one sided wear ee STARTING AND OPERATING 289 Tires may also cause the vehicle to pull to the left or right Alignment will not correct this condition See your authorized dealer for proper diagnosis Improper alignment will not cause vehicle vibration Vibration may be
332. than 5 gal 19 L when refueling e you drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at least 5 miles 8 km Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard starting and or significant deterioration in drivability during warm up NOTE Use seasonally adjusted E 85 fuel ASTM D5798 With non seasonally adjusted E 85 fuel you may experience hard starting and rough idle following start up even if the above recommendations are followed especially when the ambient temperature is below 32 F 0 C ee STARTING AND OPERATING 305 Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles E 85 and Gasoline Vehicles FFV vehicles operated on E 85 require specially formu lated engine oils These special requirements are included in MOPAR engine oils and in equivalent oils meeting Chrysler Specification MS 6395 The manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Material Standard MS 6395 MS 6395 contains additional requirements developed during ex tensive fleet testing to provide additional protection to Chrysler LLC engines Use MOPAR or an equivalent oil meeting the specification MS 6395 Starting The characteristics of E 85 fuel make it unsuitable for use when ambient temperatures fall below 0 F 18 C In the range of 0 F 18 C to 32 F 0 C you may experience an increase in the time it takes for your engine to start and a deterioration in drivability sags and or hes
333. the center The function of the left hand control is different depending on which mode you are in The following describes the left hand control operation in each mode Radio Operation Pressing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch will SEEK down for the next listenable station The button located in the center of the left hand control will tune to the next pre set station that you have programmed in the radio pre set push buttons CD Player Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next track on the CD Pressing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the current track or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the second track three times it will play the third etc The button in the center of the left hand switch changes CD s on the 6 Disc in dash CD changer radio This button does not function for all other radios CD DVD MAINTENANCE To keep a CD DVD in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M 3 Do not apply paper or tape to the disc avoid scratch ing the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzine thin
334. the seat belt restraint 1 Airbags systems The driver s front airbag is mounted in the 2 Knee Bolsters steering wheel The passenger s front airbag is mounted e in the instrument panel above the glove compartment NOTE The front airbags are certified to the Federal The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag regulations that allow less forceful deployment covers 81c8b05b eee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 The front airbags have a multistage inflator design This may allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation WARNING that are based on collision severity and occupant size e Do not put anything on or around the front airbag covers or attempt to manually open them You may damage the airbags and you could be injured because the airbags are no longer functional These protective covers for the airbag cushions are This vehicle may also be equipped with window bags to protect the driver and front and rear passengers sitting next to a window If the vehicle is equipped with window bags they are located above the side windows Their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG designed to open only when the airbags are inflat ing NOTE Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior If your vehicle is equipped with window bags do trim but they will open to allow airbag deployment not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the window bag The area where the
335. ther than Adding Coolant specified HOAT engine coolant antifreeze may Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine result in engine damage and may decrease corro coolant antifreeze that allows extended maintenance sion protection If a non HOAT coolant is intro intervals This engine coolant antifreeze can be used up duced into the cooling system in an emergency it to 5 Years or 102 000 miles 170 000 km before replace should be replaced with the specified engine cool ment To prevent reducing this extended maintenance ant antifreeze as soon as possible period it is important that you use the same engine Continued coolant antifreeze throughout the life of your vehicle 368 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT engine coolant antifreeze When adding engine coolant antifreeze e The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology e Mix a minimum solution of 50 HOAT engine coolant antifreeze and distilled water Use higher concentra tions not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are anticipated Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion ized water when mixing the water engine coolant antifreeze solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please no
336. thermostat opens allowing hot coolant to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle Check coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle If antifreeze needs to be added contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against freezing If frequent engine coolant antifreeze additions are required or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks Maintain engine coolant antifreeze concentration at 50 HOAT engine coolant antifreeze minimum and distilled deionized water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 371 e Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning also keep the front of the condenser clean e Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory engine coolant antifreeze performance poor gas mileage and increased emissions Brake System Fluid Level Check Brake M
337. tion 168 Limited Slip Differential liess 262 Loading Vehicle 2 248 92465494 eRERERER RE Rn 308 Tires ya ce Se need eek REGES LAURI SEO RS Bas 276 LOCKS uui e hem Ce Ue dne tarde a s 29 Auto Unlock 2 2359 RR ERES 31 Automatic Door si cse sagneta nanie ran 30 Child Protection llle 32 DOON PCT 29 KOS scade depre P urn M RE ee RS 12 Power Doof sorea eraa o a ae ER Oe EC RAE Ss 29 Steering Wheel ics beie sepet baie eee sas 15 Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH 444648494904 945444F64 4 5444 84 61 Lubrication Body 1 1 eee ee 362 Lug NUS 2360400 sab en cedat eee eS eee 341 Lumbar Support cic as an ee do eas 117 Maintenance Free Battery 4 359 Maintenance Procedures sls 356 Maintenance Schedule LL 400 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 175 354 Manual Service llle 421 Manual Transmission 239 242 372 Fluid Level Check 0 000000 372 Lubricant Selection LL 372 398 DM Speeds aco Fini d box eet on eee 243 Map Reading Lights 0 00040 136 MUrrors 5 ess Bod ea ee eh EG ROSEO Ke ox 80 en INDEX 437 Electric Powered 0 0 00 eee eee ae 81 Outside o ssri rpad eee eee ay he rad 80 Rearview seses goons eae a bake ha va ed dada 80 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 7 Monitor Tire Pressure System 292 Mopar Paris se evaserat esa les 355 4
338. tion Outside Temperature Because the ambient temperature sensor is located under the hood engine temperature can influence the displayed temperature therefore temperature readings are slowly updated when the vehicle speed is below 20 mph 30 km h or during stop and go driving GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED HomeLink replaces up to three remote controls hand held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers motorized gates lighting or home security systems The HomeLink unit operates off of your vehi cle s battery The HomeLink buttons are located in the overhead console and contain one two or three dots lines desig nating the different HomeLink channels ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 WARNING Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are training the Universal Transceiver Do not train the transceiver if people or pets are in the path of the door or gate Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a stop and reverse feature as required by federal safety standards This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982 Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features Call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for safety information HomeLink Buttons or assistance NOTE HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Theft Alarm is active 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR
339. tion dyes to the engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives Disposing of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your authorized dealer service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection The manufacturer s engines have a full flow type oil filter Use a filter of this type for replacement The quality of replacement filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine oil filters are a high quality oil filter and are recommended ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 359 Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for proper maintenance intervals WARNING The air cleaner can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air cleaner unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air cleaner removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury E
340. tion rates may be possible based on collision severity and occu pant size The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the bags inflate to their full size The bags fully inflate in about 50 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes The bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The driver s front airbag gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se window bag pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window The airbag forcefully inflates in about one quarter of the time it takes to blink your eye Make sure you are seated and belted properly and do not position items in the area where the window bag inflates This especially applies to children The window bag is only about 3 1 2 in 9 cm thick when it is inflated NOTE At no time should any supplemental restraint system SRS component or SRS related component or fastener be modified or replaced with any part except those which are approved by Chrylser LLC Mopar the airbag The passenger s front airbag gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of the airbag In this way the airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle e The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and the front passenger and position every
341. to the emission control system It could also affect fuel economy and driveability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message After fuel is added the vehicle diagnostic system can determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose improp erly installed or damaged A loose fuel filler cap message will be displayed in the instrument cluster Tighten the gas cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened Press the odometer RESET button to turn the message off If the 354 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se problem persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started This might indicate a damaged cap If the problem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the MIL Resolving the problem will turn the MIL off EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration For states that require an Inspection and Mainte nance I M this check verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD II system is ready for testing
342. tools from stowage 340 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 8148c28f Positioning of the Jack Front Wheels 4 When changing a rear wheel assemble the jack drive tube to the jack and connect the drive tube to the extension tube Place the jack under the axle in the positions shown with the drive tubes extending to the rear Connect the jack tube extension and wheel wrench Left Rear Jacking Location 8148c293 ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 341 WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make 8148c297 Right Rear Jacking Location NOTE Before raising the wheel off the ground make sure that the jack will not damage surrounding truck parts and adjust the jack position as required 5 By rotating the wheel wrench clockwise raise the vehicle until the wheel just clears the surface the vehicle unstable and cause an accident It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire 6 Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel off Install the spare wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end of the nuts toward the wheel Lightly tighten the nuts To avoid risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not fully tighten the nuts until the vehicle has been lowered 7 Using the wheel wrench finish tightening the nuts in a crisscross pattern Correct nut tightness is 120 to 160 ft Ibs 163 to 217 N m If in doubt about the correct tightness have them che
343. ts no asson 192 housing Reading Lights sse d eR er Ren WL2122 LIGHT BULBS Exterior Bulb No Headlight es RR kx H13 Front Park Turn Side Marker 3157NA Back Up is ete RE mE dr a 3157 Center High Mounted Stop Light 921 Foglighdt z 2c m n e 9145 License Plate Light siu eese mn 168 Rear Tail Stop Tum Signal 0 3057 388 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 3 Grasp the headlight and pull firmly to disengage the headlight housing from the fender panel 4 While firmly holding the headlight housing in your hands unlock and disconnect headlight bulb connector 5 Twist 1 4 turn and remove headlight bulb from hous ing and replace 81489f37 NOTE The headlight bulb is a halogen bulb Take care not to touch the bulb with your fingers Body oils from your fingers could cause excessive heat buildup which reduces bulb life To remove the park turn signal bulb rotate bulb socket 1 4 turn and remove socket from housing Pull bulb straight from socket 81489143 ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 389 Rear Side Marker Taillamps Stop Lamps And 2 Pull the taillamp housing straight out from the body Turn Signal Bulbs Replacement 9 1 Remove the two screws that pass through the bed sheet metal 390 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 3 Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it 4 Pull bulb straight out of socket from the housing 3 ee MAINTAI
344. ture has been changed 7 To reactivate the feature repeat the above Steps 8 If a chime is not heard program mode was canceled before the feature could be changed If necessary repeat the above procedure Child Protection Door Lock To provide a safer environment for children riding in the rear seat the rear doors of your vehicle have the child Child Lock Lever protection door lock system ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 To use the system open each rear door slide the lever up to engage the locks and down to disengage the child protection locks When the system on a door is engaged that door can only be opened by using the outside door handle even if the inside door lock is in the unlocked position WARNING Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the child protection locks are engaged NOTE e After setting the child protection door lock system always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position e For emergency exit with the system engaged move the door lock switch to the UNLOCK position roll down the window and open the door with the outside door handle 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M WINDOWS Power Windows The control on the left front door has up down switches that give you finger tip control of all four power win dows There is a single ope
345. ty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder AII work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty Discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many authorized dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment WARRANTY INFORMATION U S Vehicles Only See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Motors LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle 420 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M MOPAR PARTS Mopar fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from an authorized dealer They will help keep the vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In The 50 United States And Washingion D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should
346. u as well In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly J Continued Latch Plate To Buckle 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING Continued 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your a abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up A beltthat is worn under your arm is very danger on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if itis too tight ous Your body could strike the inside surfaces of tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug belt the vehicle in a collision increasing head and neck reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision injury and a belt worn under the arm can cause g internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision A shoulder belt placed behind will not protect you from injury during a collision You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together Removing Slack From Belt ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 6 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle f WARNINGI The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position e A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of If necessary slide the latch plate down the
347. une Scroll control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune Scroll control knob Press the Tune Scroll control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button For vehicles equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button use the Tune Scroll control to select SET CLOCK and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 For vehicles not equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary Tune Scroll control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary Tune Scroll control knob and BASS will display Turn the Tune Scroll control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones Push the rotary Tune Scroll control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the Tune Scro
348. ved including interference that may cause undesired operation The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the following licenses United States oprea nets pdt Rye KR55120123 Canada 2o o e e620 e 2671 5120123 STARTING AND OPERATING 297 FUEL REQUIREMENTS All engines except 4 7L HO engines are designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excellent fuel economy and performance when using high quality un 800diab leaded regular gasoline having an oc tane rating of 87 The use of premium gasoline is not recommended Under normal conditions the use of premium gasoline will not provide a benefit over high quality regular gasolines and in some circum stances may result in poorer performance REGOMMENDED OCTANE RATING IReMy2 METHOD The 4 7L HO engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide satis factory fuel economy and performance when using high quality unleaded gaso line having an octane range of 87 to 91 The manufacturer recommends the use of 91 octane for optimum performance REGOMMENDED OCTANE RATING IReMy2 METHOD 208 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experi ence these symptoms try another brand o
349. velop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed either on the face of the driver s door or on the driver s side B pillar Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure Information for vehicle loads that are less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition These pressure con ditions will be found in the Supplemental Tire Pressure Information section of this manual The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month Use a good quality pocket type gauge to check tire pressure DO NOT make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated 282 STARTING AND OPERATING Se CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap if equipped This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure
350. ving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Don t leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle Power Door Locks A power door lock switch is on each front door trim panel Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Power Door Lock Switch If you press the power door LOCK switch while the key is in the ignition and any front door is open the power locks will not operate This prevents you from acciden tally locking your keys in the vehicle Removing the key or closing the door will allow the locks to operate A chime will sound if the key is in the ignition switch and the driver s door is open as a reminder to remove the key Automatic Door Locks If this feature is enabled your door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle s speed exceeds 15 mph 24 km h This feature is enabled when your vehicle is shipped from the assembly plant and can be disabled by using the following procedure 1 Enter your vehicle and close all doors 2 Fasten your seat belt Fastening the seat belt will cancel any chiming that may confuse you during this programming procedure 3 Place the key into the ignition ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 4 Within 10 seconds cycle the key from the LOCK position
351. w to store a name in the phonebook refer to Add Names to Your UConnect Phonebook in the phonebook The UConnect system will confirm the name and then dial the corresponding phone number which may appear in the display of certain radios Add Names to Your UConnect Phonebook NOTE Adding names to the UConnect phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion Press the PHONE button to begin UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87 After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook New Entry When prompted say the name of the new entry Use of long names helps the voice recognition and it is recommended For example say Robert Smith or Robert instead of Bob When prompted enter the number designation e g Home Work Mobile or Pager This will allow you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook entry if desired When prompted recite the phone number for the phonebook entry that you are adding After you are finished adding an entry into the phone book you will be given the opportunity to add more phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the main menu 88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The UConnect system will allow you to enter up to 32 names in the phonebook with each name having up to four associated phone numbers and designations Each language has a separate 32 name phonebook accessible only in that language In additi
352. webbing to internal injury in a collision The belt forces won t allow the belt to retract fully be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your abdomen Always wear the lap belt as low as WARNING possible and keep it snug A twisted belt can t do its job as well In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your authorized dealer and have it fixed A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the front and second row outboard seats the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to help position the belt away from your neck Push in on the anchorage release button to release the anchorage and then move it up or down to the position that fits you best Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower
353. which may cause personal injury NOTE Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front or rear wheels are spinning The NV 244 Generation II transfer case is not equipped with a synchronizer and therefore the front and rear driveshaft speeds must be equal for the shift to take place Shifting while only the front or rear wheels are spinning can cause damage to the transfer case When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW the engine speed is approximately three times that of the 4WD or 4WD LOCK positions at a given road speed Take care not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h Proper operation of 4 wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size type and circumference on each wheel Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the transfer case Because 4 wheel drive provides improved traction there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds Do not go faster than road conditions permit WARNING You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the parking brake The transfer case NEUTRAL position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move regardless of the transmission position The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle 260 STARTING AND OPERATING ME For additional information on the ap
354. xible Fuel 4 7L Engine Only If Equipped 302 E 85 General Information 302 Ethanol Fuel E 85 004 304 Fuel Requirements 304 Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles E 85 And Gasoline Vehicles 305 DUANE ue care ese eae iw Rial Soars Ge us 305 Cruising Range ngas asain eae wae des 305 Replacement Parts 0 305 B Adding Fuel 2 4264 cea CERE ERAS 306 Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap 306 B Vehicle Loading 000 308 Certification Label surua iannu pn rnae 308 Curb Weights 33s raea npa acre Gaba E 309 238 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Loading is as ana d bee OO E es 309 B Trailer Towing zar ek rkue3gpwewEERE EE e 310 Common Towing Definitions 311 Trailer Hitch Classification 315 Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings ied es 316 Trailer And Tongue Weight 316 Towing Requirements 317 Towing Tips see m eR cade ees 322 B Socwpliu sucer ma ys ee Sas 323 lll Recreational Towing Behind Motorhome Bie aa patchy a OS by ete EGA RES Y e 324 2WD Models 4 vee kid ea a aes 324 4WD Models 1 2 2 0 000 cee 324 en STARTING AND OPERATING 239 STARTING PROCEDURES Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust both inside and outside mirrors and fasten your seat belts
355. xiliary power outlets that can provide up to 20 Amps of current for accessories designed for use with standard power outlet adapters The outlets are located in the instrument panel below the temperature control setting knob and inside the full size center console When the optional Cigar Lighter heating element is used it heats when pushed in and pops out automatically when ready for use To preserve the heating element do not hold the lighter in the heating position The instrument panel outlet can be reconfigured by the customer to operate only when the ignition is ON switch battery fed or with the ignition switch ON OFF battery fed to allow for cellular phone charging and or opera tion while the ignition is OFF This can be done by moving the power outlet switchable fuse fuse 22 from the inboard position to the outboard position NOTE All accessories connected to these outlets should be removed or turned OFF when the vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against discharge unless the cus tomer has reconfigured the fuse block to switched battery feed 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Electrical Outlet Use With Engine OFF Battery CAUTION Continued Fed Configuration e After the use of high power draw accessories or CAUTION long periods of the vehicle not being started with e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use ie
356. xles Front Axle Front axle fluid level should be at the bottom of the fill plug Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion Protection of Body And Paint from Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse affect on paint metal trim and under body protection The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 377 The most common causes are e Use MOPAR Cleaner Wax to remove road film tains and tect aint finish Take care n e Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation stains ana to p ubi duds EH ane to scratch the paint e St d gravel impact Stone RI grave pas e Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing e Insects tree sap and tar that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish e Salt in the air near seacoast localities e Atmos
357. xperts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are at least one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs 9 kg Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats e The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children who weigh up to about 20 lbs 9 kg Convertible child seats can be used either rearward facing or forward facing in the vehicle Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children who weigh more than 20 lbs 9 kg but are less than one year old Both types of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the seat belt or the LATCH child ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 restraint anchorage system Refer to LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System in this section e Rearward facing child seats must NEVER be used in the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger airbag that does not have a switch to turn the airbag Off An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position Older Children and Child Restraints e Children who weigh more than 20 lbs 9 kg and who are older than one year can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direction are for children who weig
358. y not be ready to inflate for your protection Promptly 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME check the fuse block for blown fuses Refer to the label located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper airbag fuses See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good Event Data Recorder EDR In the event of an accident your vehicle is designed to record up to five seconds of specific vehicle data param eters see the following list in an event data recorder prior to the moment of airbag deployment or near deployment and up to a quarter second of high speed deceleration data during and or after airbag deploy ment EDR data are ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys or nearly deploys and are otherwise unavailable NOTE 1 A near deployment event occurs when the airbag sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indica tive of a crash but not severe enough to warrant airbag deployment 2 Under certain circumstances EDR data may not be recorded e g loss of battery power In conjunction with other data gathered during a com plete accident investigation the electronic data may be used by Chrylser LLC and others to learn more about the possible causes of crashes and associated injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle performance In addition to crash investigations initiated by Chrylser LLC such investigations may be requested by customers insurance carriers government officials
359. y be achieved under specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits Load Identification blank Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL Tire Extra Load XL Extra load or reinforced tire Light Load Light load tire C D E Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire ee STARTING AND OPERATING 275 Tire Identification Number TIN Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on however the date code may only be on one side Tires the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including the side of the tire date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA Code representing the tire manufacturing location two digits L9 Code represent
360. your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS H Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your In Canadas reren raris Pah he baw a 420 NEN OR a eyed AAA AEE i E Publication Order Forms 421 Prepare For The Appointment 419 Bl Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire Prepare A Lists ssec af gage area C4 RSS ac 419 Quality Grades ie ev Pitan nia eis 422 Be Reasonable With Requests 419 Treadweat 2 44 cede nhe heh dee 422 ll Warranty Information U S Vehicles Only 419 Traction Grades 0 0 2 0 000 eee ee 422 MMOPAR Parts 420 Temperature Grades 00 0 Bi Reporting Safety Defects 00 420 Milf You Need Assistance lisse In The 50 United States And Washington Chrysler LLC Customer Center DG esu xa rir RR RUP Edo dex 420 418 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center 424 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or lin Mexico Contact kr rieterR iners 424 apesan a ties batur To Service Contract isse icgec r db denen 425 ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 419 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you re having warran

Dodge 2008 Magnum Automobile User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents